&u,„^* sfc* /r./rri 



f 









^.LIBRARY OF CONGRESS.* 

!|kaf5$| wigW | I 



I UNITED STATES Of AMERICA, f 

f 



INTRODUCTION 



GREEK LANGUAGE ; 

CONTAINING 

AN OUTLINE OF THE GRAMMAR, WITH 
APPROPRIATE EXERCISES, 

FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND PRIVATE LEARNERS. 

BY ASAHEL C. EENDRICK, 

PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE, IN THE 
HAMILTON LITERARY AND THEOLOGICAL INSTITUTION. 



UTICA: 

BENNETT, BACKUS, & HAWLEY, FRANKLIN SQUARE. 

1S43. 






3 



\*« 



Entered according to Act of Congress, 

By Bennett, Backus, & Hawley, 

i the Clerk's Office of the Northern District of New York. 

in ihe year 1841, 



1 ^ 



INTRODUCTION. 



In preparing the little work which is here offered to the 
public, the author had more immediate reference to the wants 
of the Institution with which he is connected. An experience 
of more than ten years, as an instructor in the Greek lan- 
guage, had led him deeply to feel the need of some work which 
should render accessible to his own pupils, and to American 
students generally, the latest and most improved views in 
this department of Greek Philology. In no field of investi- 
gation, perhaps, have the last fifty years witnessed more dili- 
gent and successful labors than in that of the Greek Gram- 
mar. Many useless and cumbrous theories have been explo- 
ded, and much light been shed upon the structure and philos- 
ophy of this noble tongue. That the beginner in Greek should 
be able to avail himself of these improvements — that they 
should be admitted, as soon as they are fully shown to be 
improvements, into our systems of elementary instruction, is 
obviously desirable. In a study so extensive as the Greek, 
and which, at best, must consume no small amount of time, 
it is important that the student be led to his object by the most 
direct and improved route. He should have all the aids which 
the most thorough scholarship can afford him. The true 
principles of the language should be at once presented, in a 
plain and familiar manner, and he required to learn nothing 
which he will be obliged to discard at a subsequent stage of 
his progress as cumbersome and erroneous — nothing which 
is not the result — and will not therefore stand the test, of the 
most profound and searching investigation. 



True, no judicious instructor will endeavor to teach the 
philosophy of a language, in advance of the facts. But he 
will feel the importance of making all his statements and 
modes of representation harmonize perfectly with the most 
enlightened philosophical views of the subject. He will, at 
all events, not present, on the ground of practical conven- 
ience, any instructions which he is himself aware that the 
student, on contemplating them from a higher point of view, 
will instantly reject as artificial, useless, and false. Indeed, 
among the most mischievous of the errors which more or less 
prevail in our systems of elementary instruction, is the sepa- 
ration which is so often made between what is correct in the- 
ory and what is convenient in practice. We meet, not un- 
frequently in books prepared for schools, the remark, that, 
such and such modes of exhibiting the subject are not indeed 
correct in theory, but are adopted as being practically con- 
venient. Statements like this the writer believes to be wholly 
founded in mistake. One of the best tests of the correctness 
of a theory is, its susceptibility of being reduced to practice; 
and that is unquestionably the best and soundest theory which 
is found most convenient and efficient in practice. The wri- 
ter's own experience has certainly borne ample testimony to 
the correctness of these views. He has found that in propor- 
tion as his elementary instructions were thoroughly analyti- 
cal and searching, and developed in fact, if not in form, the 
philosophy of the language, his pupils have evinced the deep- 
est interest, and made the most rapid progress. 

The above remarks are designed to apply more particularly 
lo the Greek verb. The old mode of splitting it up into a 
large number of conjugations, artificially distinguished, and 
Still more of forming the tenses from each other by a circuit- 
ous process, ha 3 done much to embarrass the progress of the 
student, and to obscure the beauty and destroy the symmetry 



of one of the noblest structures in the whole compass of human 
language. The writer is happy in knowing that sounder 
views on this subject are rapidly spreading, as the labors of 
the best German grammarians, Thiersch, Rost, Buttmann, 
Kiihner, &c, are becoming better known among us. The 
recent grammar of Mr. Sophicles is, in this, as in other re- 
spects, a valuable contribution to the cause of Greek Philol- 
ogy ; and the author cherishes the hope that the time is not 
far distant when all the senseless jargon which has so long 
encumbered and disgraced our Grammars, in regard to the 
formation of the tenses, will be consigned to merited oblivion. 

In the present work, an attempt is made to aid this object, 
and to assist American students in obtaining correct views on 
the leading points of Greek Grammar. How far the author 
has succeeded, a judicious public will judge. He would 
invite particular attention to his development of the third 
declension. It is, in some respects, new, and the writer in- 
dulges the hope that it will be found superior in simplicity 
and completeness to the methods adopted in our ordinary 
Grammars. The verb, also, has been treated with as much 
fullness as the nature of the work admitted. The subjects 
of the Argument, and of the nature and import of the moods 
and tenses, will, it is hoped, be found to be cleared of some 
difficulties with which they are encumbered in the ordinary 
mode of treatment. Those who object to the partially new 
nomenclature here adopted, will, it is hoped, find this no seri- 
ous objection to their using the work. A half an hour spent 
in explanation to their pupils will obviate any difficulty ari- 
sing from this source. The author has not introduced new 
names of tenses from any spirit of innovation, but from a deep 
conviction that the existing nomenclature is extremely defect- 
ive, and, in some cases, erroneous. He would at least, 
recommend that the names Imperfect Present and Past, and 



6 

Perfect Present and Past, and, in the Passive, Perfect Future 
should be substituted for the common designations of these 
tenses, as tending to give the student clear and correct impres- 
sions of their nature, and save much labor in the department 
of syntax. Special pains have been taken in tracing out the 
various meanings of the prepositions, and in rendering the 
vocabulary accurate, and as full as the limits of the work 
allowed. 

The author may be permitted to say, that the leading prin- 
ciples of the Greek Grammar are here presented substantially 
in the manner in which he has for years taught them to his 
pupils. His custom is to go very slowJy over the difFerent 
topics as they come up, delaying upon each until the student 
is perfectly master of it. In regard to the verb, especially, 
the object at which he uniformly aims, is, to give each mem- 
ber of a class such perfect command of it, as that he can go 
through an entire verb, inflecting every part without mistake 
or hesitation. And this object he has generally found himself 
able to accomplish. Every student, of moderate abilities, 
in the course of a few weeks, becomes able to give the inflec- 
tions of the verb in all its voices, moods, and tenses, in the 
space of from five to ten minutes, stating or indicating every 
deviation from the regular forms. No exercise, to which the 
author subjects his pupils, has been found more profitable 
than this. They acquire by it such a mastery over the verb 
in all its parts, as greatly to facilitate their subsequent pro- 
gress. 

It may be thought, perhaps, that the exercises in this book 
are not sufficiently numerous. Many more might have been 
added, but even then but a small number could have been 
given in comparison with those which every experienced and 
faithful teacher will give orally to his pupils. The writer 



would recommend that every instructor should add to the 
exercises here given, by taking the same words and throwing 
them into new combinations. These exercises should for a 
long time be of a very simple character, those words being 
chiefly employed with which the pupil is familiar. The use 
of the article, the adjective, the pronoun, &c, should be thus 
illustrated by familiar examples, and sufficiently copious on 
each head, to render the impression distinct and indelible. 

If the author may be permitted to advert to his own expe- 
rience as a teacher in Greek, he would express his conviction 
that the secret of success here is to go slowly over the ele- 
ments, and attend to only one thing at a time. To dwell on 
each topic until the pupil has perfectly mastered it, is the 
way to make his acquisitions profitable, and his subsequent 
progress easy, rapid, and delightful. He will not then feel 
that the region he has passed over swarms with enemies no 
less numerous and formidable than those he has yet to encoun- 
ter. He will not have the difficulties magnified by being 
seen through the mists of imperfect, half-formed ideas. On 
the contrary, he will contemplate with pleasure all the ground 
which he has hitherto gone over. Every victory that he has 
achieved will prove a stimulant to renewed and augmented 
exertion ; he will advance with constantly accelerated pace, 
and will feel, at every step, the toils of study repaid by the 
delights of perfect knowledge. Let, then, the teacher dismiss 
all anxiety to conduct his pupils, within a given time, over a 
wide surface. Let him estimate their progress rather, by the 
depth to which they have descended — the accuracy and thor- 
oughness of their knowledge, than by the number of topics to 
which they have given a superficial attention. Let the stu- 
dent be content, especially in the commencement of his course, 
to hasten slowly — to dig deep, and to lay the foundation of 
his edifice on a rock. He will find his labor amply reward- 



8 

ed, not only by its firmness and durability, but by the rapidity 
with which it is reared. The writer, on this point, speaks 
with knowledge. He has tried repeatedly the thorough meth- 
od, and he has found it attended by results as satisfactory as 
they were unexpected. He believes, firmly, that by carrying 
out faithfully the principles here inculcated, a judicious teach- 
er might, in the course of a single year, give his pupils a 
more extensive and radical acquaintance with the principles 
of the Greek language than is possessed by the majority of 
College students at the period of their graduation. 

In conclusion, the writer would express his ardent desire 
that the present little work may contribute to the advance- 
ment of Greek learning in this country. That it is faultless, 
he has not the vanity to suppose; and, indeed, the examina- 
tion of the sheets, as they have issued from the press, has 
suggested to him many improvements, which he would be 
happy if a second edition should give him the opportunity of 
making. The fact of its having issued from the Cambridge 
press, would be a sufficient guarantee for the general accu- 
racy, neatness, and elegance of its execution ; and the author 
has taken much pains to have it go before the public as free 
from errors as possible. 

Hamilton, June 9, 1841. 



INTRODUCTION 

TO THE 

STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



§ 


1. THE ALPHABET. 


The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four 


letters, viz. 






A a 


3 AXcpa 


Mpha a 


B 6 


BrJTa 


Beta b 


r rr 


Ed^ia 


Gamma g hard 


A 8 


AiXra 


Delta d 


E s 


*E ipiXov 


Epsilon e short 


z I 


Zr\xa 


Zeta dz 


H n 


r Hza 


Eta e long [thick 


& 


Orjxa 


Theta th sharp, as in 


I i 


'lara 


Iota i 


K x 


KoLitna 


Kappa k 


A A 


AdpfiSa 


Lambda I 


M (i 


Mv 


Mu m 


N v 


Nv 


JYu n 


X 1 


m 


Xi x 


O o 


U fiixgov 


Omicron o short 


n n & 


m 


Pi p 


P 9 


C PS 


Rho r 


2 tf, s final 2Jty[ia 


Sigma s sharp 


T t7 


Tav 


Tau t 


t v 


'YxpiXov 


Upsilon u 


Cp 


0L 


Phi ph 


x X 


XI 


Chi ch 


& yj 


m 


Psi ps 


SL co 


iy Jl {isya. 


Omega o long 



10 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

€ and v were originally used both as vowels 
and as breathings, s was equivalent to our h, 
v to our / or v.* When used as vowels they 
were called ^ikd, smooth or unaspirated. The 
sound of/ or v was also expressed by a letter 
resembling a double gamma, (f,) hence called 
Digamma. 

§ 2. PRONUNCIATION OF THE 
LETTERS. 

1. The Consonants are generally sounded 
like the English letters placed opposite them 
in the table, y, otherwise hard, before a pala- 
tal mute (x, y, #,) is sounded like ng, as ciyys- 
kos anggelos, *Ay%i<$r\s Angchises, ayxcov ang- 
kon, Z(piy% Sphinx. 

2. Vowels, s and r\ are sounded like a in 
fate ; s short as in 8i, i\ long as in ijSn {delay). 

e however, in the middle of a syllable and in 
the antepenult is shortened (corripitur) into the 
sound of e in met, as nivxs pentay, stvtib 
etupay. 

3. o and a are sounded like o in note, iya, 
vno. o before a consonant is commonly short- 
ened into o in not, as koyos (logos). 

4. a, i, v, may be either short or long, hence 
called doubtful. 

* Of this original power of u many traces remain in the later form of the 
language. Compare P>oZs with the Latin hos, bovis, and vavg with the 
Latin navis. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 11 

a long is sounded like a in father, short like 
a in fat. 

i long like i in machine, short like i in pin. 

Note. In the antepenult these letters are 
generally sounded short. 

v always like u in tube. 

5. Diphthongs. These are formed by the 
union of the back vowels, a, s, 6, a, v, co, with 
the front vowels, v, i, and of these latter with 
each other. 

at, av, si, ev, oi, ov, vi, are called proper diph- 
thongs. 

at, av, ni, wv, cot, av, vi, are called improper 
diphthongs. 

In at, r\i, cot, the i is written under (a, y, co), 
hence called i subscript. Of the proper diph- 
thongs, 

at is sounded like the English ay. 

av like ow in now, avxdg (owtar). 

oi like oi in voice. 

ov like oo in moon, ovxoi. 

vi like the English pronoun we. 

6. Examples. Movaa, pronounced with ov 
like oo, and a sharp, as in sin ; [.wvavs, ov and 
a as before, i\ like long a in fate (moosase). 
Pronounce avxos, avTrjs, tovtov, Tavxy\g, avrai, 
ravrnv, rig, xivog (tenos), Tvmco, tvtztov, ov7ico, 
pifyfo eXsyov, Tvitrerai, iXs^dfxrfv, vlos, vloL 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



§ 3. DIVISION OF THE CONSONANTS. 

1. Consonants are divided into 

a) Double consonants, J, equivalent to 8a 
(pronounced soft, dz), and |, yj, for which see 
^ 4. 1. 

b) Semivowels, A, ^, v, g, a, of which A, p, v, 
g, are called liquids, and (i, v, (together with 
y sounded as ng,) are nasals. 

c) Mutes, distributed according to their 
organ of pronunciation, thus, 

lip-letters, or labials, it, /3, cp, 
palate-letters, or palatals, x, y, %, 
tongue-letters, or Unguals, t, 8, &. 

2. These are again distinguished as unaspi- 
rated, or smooth, it, x, t ■ aspirated, or rough, 
(p, %, &• and partially aspirated, hence called 
intermediate, or middle, /3, y, 8. 

3. The mutes then sustain to each other a 
twofold relation, thus expressed ; 

Smooth, Middle, Rough. 
Labials, it, (3, cp, 

Palatals, x, y, %, 

Linguals, t, 8, &. 

% i. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 

The following principles enter extensively 
into the inflections of the Greek language. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 13 

Especially in nouns, adjectives, and participles, 
of the third declension, and in the verb, the 
student will be required to recur to them at 
every step. 

1. Labial mutes with a {itd, fid, yd,) form the 
double consonant ijj. 

Palatals with a (xd, yd, %d,) form the double 
consonant |. * 

Linguals before a (xd, dd, &d,) are dropped. 
Thus, 

yvits, fiXsTtdco, (pkifis, ygdcpdco — yvip, filixpo, 
cpksip, ygdxpco. 

xogaxs, Xeydco, ovv%s, cpdXayyg, — xdgat;, Aifw, 
ovv%, cpdXay%. 

%dgirs, laiindds, nsi&dco, addco, dapardi, — 
%dgis, Xapndg, neida, ado, dco^adi. 

2. Labials before ^ (tt/i, fip, (p$) become p. 
Palatals before p (up, yp, %(*,) become y. 
Linguals before fi (t^, dp, &fx,) become d. 

Thus, 

TEiv7tfxac, si'hjppou, yiygacppcu, — TSTVfxpai, 
si'hr}[A[Aai, yeyga^iai. 

nijiXeycfiat, XeXeypai, TETv%[iai, — nenXsypai, 
XiXsypai, xixvypcu. 

TjvvTfiai, qdpou, nknu&pai, — r\vvd[iai, ydpcu, 

TtkltSLdliaL. 

3. Linguals before linguals usually become 
d, as S7t8Ld , -&r}v hnzid-&r\v, j}8&r}v jjd&qv, and 

* Except compounds with ix, as ixtra^a, not ££«£«. 
1* 



14 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

before x are dropped, as nknu&xa, nkituxa, 
ySxa yxa, ijgnadxa ygnaxa. 

4. v, fi, and y sounded as Jig, are nasal, v a 
lingual, p a labial, y (ng) a palatal. Therefore 
v stands only before Unguals ; before the labials 
(/3, 7r, (p, (i,) it is changed into p, before the 
palatals (x, y, %,) into y. Thus, for ivfidnxco, 
ivTZiTtza, awn g da oco, avvcpiftAi, avvftoXos, avvyga- 
cpsvs, write k^dnxco^ s^txltixco^ av^7tgdxxco, av[i- 
<fy\lii, avfxfioXos, avyygacpzvs. 

5. v before g or A is changed into the same 
letter, as avvXkyo avkXsya, avvgdnxco avggdnxco. 

6. v before a is omitted, (except in Iv and avv, 
of which the latter is sometimes assimilated, as 
avvaixos, avaaixos. It is also retained in a few 
other words.) as daifiovai daiftoai, ^teXavs ^.dXag. 

7. v and a lingual (vr, vo, i/#,) before a are 
both dropped, and the preceding vowel, if 
short, is lengthened, as ndvxai ndai, xexvcpav- 
xai zsxvydai, ouxvvvxai dsixvvai. In this case 
e goes into a, and o into ov, as Xsovxai Xiovai, 
xvcp&ivxai xvy&sTai, ixovxac ixovai, xvnxovxai 

XVTZXOVat, 6d0VX9 6d0VS, XV71SVXS XVTtSlS. 

8. Two mutes of different organs standing 
together, must be of the same degree of aspira- 
tion, as 7TT, not n& • X7r, not xft • /3#, not /3r. 
The first is generally accommodated to the 
second, as gdcpxco gdnxco, ixvn&i\v ixvcpd^v, 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 15 

iXsy&yv ikix&yv, oxdoos oydoos, ygacpxos 
yganxos. Except ix in composition, as ix&'eih 
vat, 

9. Two successive syllables do not begin 
each with an aspirate. The first therefore is 
made smooth. This rule holds especially in 
reduplication, as rs&vxa for &i&vxa, 7t£cpil7ixa 
for (psyityxa, Ti&r}[AL for difhtfiii 

Exc. a) Aor. Pass, in d-qv, as lptf#a#?p. 
b) Compound words generally, as icpvcpaiva, 

In e/o this rule applies to the rough breath- 
ing, as £%co for s%a. 

10. A smooth mute preceding a rough 
breathing is aspirated ; thus, for §7zrj[Asgos icprj- 
[asqos. So in separate words, as dcp' ov for 
drf ov. 

11. The concurrence of three consonants is 
generally avoided ; often by dropping a, as 
sacpdXa&aL itiqmX&ai, x£xv7Z6d , ai (x£xvip6ou) xs- 
Tvcp&cu, TcenXexad-ai (jtSTiXi^&ac) 7t£7tXi%&cu. 

Exc. a) When the first or last of the con- 
sonants is a liquid (A, ^u, v, g, y sounded as ng) 9 
as 7t£[ji(p&£is, axhjgos, xkyt-a. b) When x or 
a comes in composition before two consonants, 
as Svaup&agxos, £X7ixco(jis, ixipv^co. On the other 
hand, a kindred mute is sometimes inserted 
between two liquids, to smooth the pronuncia- 
tion, as dvgos dvdgos, [i£Ornigia {.udrfpfigia, 

ll£{l}.£Tai [l£{Xp}.£TOU. 



16 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

12. Promiscuous examples. Let the pupil 
write properly the following words ; hv7Z&rjv, 
iXTjfidTjv, en:8o(xos, fisfiXaTtfiai, ndvxaa, tvtzoco, 
ivygdcpa, evyeygacpxai, ivysygcupfiai, ivyiyga- 
qpacu, £v($£fia7t[.iaL, ivefidjt&ijv, iv%£Lgi8iov, aw- 
ka(j.fidvco, 6vv\i\$G0[io.i, ctvvXtjfi&rjvai, zs&ga- 
q)[,iai, &£&gacpjcu, Xiycia, ddfia, yjTJqjidpa, fiXs- 
novTcfi, d'l-d'SVTCi, SiSovTOi, dgjiddaco, VVXTS, 
oivaxTS, xsipavaii yvrts, xkipaxai, (pscpavxa, 
7ZS7toi&avTOi, ovvTzei&ctai, cpXifioi, ygdcpda, aicovcft, 

§ 5. BREATHINGS. 

1. Every word beginning with a vowel has 
either a smooth or rough breathing (spiritus 
asper or lenis). The rough breathing is in- 
dicated thus ( c ), as dgfiovia, and answers to 
our h. Elsewhere the smooth breathing ( 3 ) is 
employed, which does not perceptibly affect 
the pronunciation, as IniL 

2. In diphthongs the breathing is placed 
over the second letter, as algsco, elkov. 

3. v in the Attic dialect is always aspirated 
at the beginning of a word, as vdxiv&os, into. 

4. g at the beginning of a word or syllable 
is aspirated, as gyjrcog. When g is doubled, 
the first takes the smooth breathing, the second 
the rough, as Ilvggos. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 17 

^ 6. ACCENTS. 

1. One syllable in every Greek word has an 
accent, i. e. is pronounced with a slight eleva- 
tion and stress of voice, called (rtgoacpdia b^sta) 
a sharp tone or accent. This syllable is indi- 
cated by this mark (') placed over the ac- 
cented syllable, as sv&vs. This is called the 
acute accent. 

2. All other syllables are said to be pro- 
nounced with the grave accent, or falling tone 
('), which is not usually expressed. 

3. When a word, whose last syllable is ac- 
cented, stands in connexion before other words, 
the acute is softened down, and is expressed 
by the grave ; thus, ogyy) 8i zroAAa dgdv dvayxd- 
&l xaxd. When therefore the student meets 
with the grave accent on the last syllable of a 
word, he will remember it is merely a softened 
acute. 

4. When two syllables, having an acute 
accent followed by a grave, are combined in 
pronunciation, their united accents make the 
circumflex (")~, as xiirtos xfJ7tos. 

§ 7. PLACE OF THE ACCENTS. 

1. The acute accent stands always over one 
of the last three syllables, the circumflex over 
one of the last two. 



18 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

2. The circumflex requires a long vowel or 
diphthong, as Tipdzs, xaXov, cpsvys, (pas. 

3. The acute can stand on the antepenult, 
only when the final syllable is short. The 
diphthongs ou and oi at the end of words are, 
in reference to this rule, chiefly regarded as 
short, as dvdgco7ioc, Tvmzxai. The principal 
exception is the Opt. 3. Sing., as nonjcai. 

4. When the last syllable is short, or long 
only by position, the penult, if long, takes only 
the circumflex, as gijfxa, olvos. 

5. If the final syllable is long, the penult can 
have only the acute, as gifccog, otvij. 

6. Contracted final syllables generally take 
the circumflex, as dfajdovs, ripd. 

7. Let the pupil accent the following words 
(the dots indicating the accented syllable), %gij- 
a, 'srvrtTOV, cfvvodos, *Ake £avdgog, nagd, sicodec, 
dveyva, daxrvkiov, ixsivov, ticpgayidd, ngdy^id^ 
irtedrjTcsv. 

§ 8. CONTRACTIONS. 

1. These arise from the concurrence of two 
or more vowels, and take place sometimes in 
the radical part of a word, as eag, rjg, more 
frequently by a vowel in the termination meet- 
ing a vowel in the root, as th#£-os, tu%ovs. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 19 

2. The following are some of the usual con- 
tractions. 

a) e'C and o'C into the diphthongs £i and 01, as 
tsl%s'C Tsfysi, ac8oC aldoT. 

b) Two vowels into a kindred long sound, as 
sa into 77, T£i%£a T£i%7]. es into u, as tzous, 
noiei. £0, of, oo, into ov, as T£t%£os th^ovs, 
[AidO-os-ov. ao, aov, aco, oa, 077, into co, as tl- 
fidcofX£v tl[ago£1£V, aiSoa aldS. 

c) a£, ar\, into a, as a£dXos cldXos, Tt[ia£ rifxa. 
au and aj) into a, as ri[xd£t Tt^cl. 

d) a before or after a long sound disappears, 

£01 01, £7} 71, £CD CO, C0£ CO. 

EXC. £CU J), aS TV7tT£0U TV7tTJJ. 

e) o before and after long o sounds (co, 01, 
ov,) disappears. 

Exc. on and o# become 01. 
Inf. oai> becomes ovv, as [iiadouv [iiodovv. 
For exceptions to the above rules see de- 
clensions, &,c. 

§ 9. FINAL LETTERS. 

1. To datives plural in at, and to third per- 
sons of verbs in £ and t, v is added before 
words beginning with a vowel, as lv noteaiv 
avxov, hvyjsv avjov. This is called v £cp£l%v- 
aiLxov. 

2. The preposition ix, out of, becomes l£ 
before a vowel. Ov, not, becomes before a 



20 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

vowel ovx or ov%, as ov ndqetiTiv, ovx saziv, 

OV% V7ZSOTIV. 

3. a is a weak letter, and easily falls away, 
[ii%gis and [*£%Qi, oi/gig an ^ &XQ L i ovzcos and 
ovtco. See 4 4. 11. ^ 11. 4. 6., and 2d Pers. 
Sing. Pass, of Verbs. 

4. No genuine Greek word ends in any other 
consonant than v, o, or tf, except ex and ovx, 
which, however, never terminate a clause. 

Obs. Hence nouns, whose root terminates 
in any other than one of these consonants, 
always either drop this consonant, as Tcgay^ax, 
TtQ&yna, or assume another letter, usually tf, as 
XafXTTdd (kafxrtdds) kafutds. 

§ 10. CHARACTERS. 

1. The Greek mark of interrogation is the 
English semicolon ( ; ), as tl tovto ; for a colon 
and semicolon a point is placed at the top of 
the line, thus tovto ■ xai 

2. Apostrophe ( ' ) cuts off a vowel from the 
end of a word when the next begins with a 
vowel, as dn > dg%ijs. 

3. Crasis (') is frequently employed to in- 
dicate the coalescence of vowels in different 
words, to prevent a hiatus, as to dfajdis raA?/- 
dk, toc dyadd TayaOd, toc epd Tapd, xai iv 

XOLV. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 21 

§11. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

1. Greek nouns have three numbers, singu- 
lar, plural, and dual (denoting two) ; and five 
cases expressing different relations, as follows, 

Norn. The subject of the verb. 

Gen. Of or from, indicating possession or 
origin. 

Dat. For or with, remote object or instru- 
ment. 

Ace. The object of the verb. 

Voc. Used in addressing a person. 

2. There are three forms of Greek declen- 
sion, in all which one primitive form of in- 
flexion is distinctly traceable. This form is 
probably retained with least change in impure 
(and some pure) nouns of the third declen- 
sion. 

3. In the inflexion of nouns we distinguish 
two parts, the root and the termination. A 
termination can be in no other consonant than 
v, g, or a (^ 9. 4). The roots, to which they 
are appended, may have every variety of ter- 
mination. They may end in either of the fol- 
lowing letters, mutes, n, (3, cp, x, y, %, t, 3, 0, 
liquids, A, p, v, g, vowels, a, e, q, i, o, v, o. 

4. The general termination of the nomina- 
tive is a ' this being a weak letter (§ 9. 3) it 

2 



22 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

is frequently dropped. This is especially the 
case with feminine nouns of the first declen- 
sion, and neuters of the second and third. 

5. All the consonant roots (mutes and li- 
quids) with the roots in f, i, v, belong to the 
third declension, those in a and y\ to the first, 
those in o and a chiefly to the second. The 
following table presents the usual forms. 



i f " 

O v © 



Oi O -;» A 

o © 



6 © © © o o© c © o o © 

■Q v O v © V C2 *r\ *■£-! V Q v O "O v © v O © 



•|-g -5- 



.1 nU 



r Z »» © » © :s -; a 



© © © © © 



5 2 S 5 B S 

©©OO© © s 

»s> ^ »a «i >» vg v i 

oo©oo 00 o©o©o 



"8 


-a 


"- 


"8 


n a 


C* 


^ 


'0 


Cf> 







•Q 


« 


uu 


«c 


<o 


^f 


•q 


*6 


K 


ft 


fe 


t- 


K 



<= -a S n o 

^2 o© ,0» JO JO «© Jj> <o o© 

2 3 3 2 '5 "g "g "s 

a 

H 

C£* c/) cji o * fc e <j Q s * S * ^ *" 

£ £ o" Q <i > ^ fc O S £ o Q < f> 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



23 



7. The principal irregularities in Xoyos and 
liovaa arise, it is perceived, from the rejection 
of the weak consonant a (§ 9. 3), and then 
making contractions more or less irregular, 
fiovaass iiovaas fiovcfai, Xoyoss Xoyos Xoyoi, 
Xoyoog Xoyoo Xoyov. 

8. The original termination of the Ace. Sing, 
seems to have been in v. After a consonant it 
was changed, by a law which prevailed exten- 
sively in the Greek language, into a. a being 
once adopted became the common termination, 
and the ending in v was restricted to a few 
classes of pure names. Analogous changes are 
seen in the 3 plur. Perf. Pass., as TSTgdcpaxai 
for TSTQanvTcu, and scpOdgajai for icpdagvxai. 
And the Ionic dialect abounds in forms like the 
following, 7iS7tavajai for itknoLvvxai, nvdoiaxo 
for Ttvdoivjo, xsxXtaxai for xsxXivxcu, de<j7i6xsa 
for de07toTriv.* 

§ 12. THE ARTICLE. 





Sin 


gular. 






Dual. 




Plural. 




31. 


F. 


N. 




M. F. N. 


M. 


F. N. 


N. 


6 


V 


TO 


N. 


> , 


61 


at ra, the 


G. 


TOV 


Ttjq 


TOV 


A. < 


> TO) T« TO) 


TW 


tiov Tbiv, of the 


D. 


TW 


v± 


TW 


G.\ 




To7g 


ralg rolg, to the 


A. 


TOV 


TV\V 


TO 


D-l 


Toiv Taw toIv 


Tovg 


rag tix, the. 



* See this subject treated by Hupfeld, Jahn's Yahrbiicher, Vol. IX. 
(1829,) p. 472. 



24 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



§ 13. FIRST DECLENSION. 

Characteristic vowel a, and, in the singular, ^. 
The masculine adds s, thus making four ter- 
minations, a, ?/, feminine, as, ijs, masculine. 

1. Terminations. 



N. 

a 



Sing. 
G. D. A. 

7]q rj av 



V. 



« (pure) a? 
ga 



V 
ag 

7jg 



So <5o'|a, glory, ylojooa, a tongue, 

■Oulaaaa, a sea. 
So cpi'hla. friendship, oxid, a sha- 
dow, ohlvc, a house, 
gag ga gav ga. So -frvga, a door, rjfiiga, a day. 
Xwqm, a region. 
So Ivnrj, grief, Tifxrj, honor, xjjvxrj, 

a soul, cptovrj, a voice- 
So vsaviag, a youth, ta^iag, a steio- 

ard, JJv&ayogag. 
So 7ion)Ti']Q, a poet, Xi]OTT]g, a rob- 
ber, TdoJvrjg, a tax-gatherer. 



rjg jj 7}V r\ 



V 



Dual, 
cciv aiv a a. 
Plural, 
(av aig ug ai 



Examples. 



y\ do$u, glory. <% t^tJ, honor. 6 ttoIIttiq, the 

citizen. 



Sing. 
N. 86%a 
G. do^rjg 

D. doty 
A. do$uv 
V. do$a 



Sing. 
N. rifir) 
G. Tiprjg 

D. Tlf-HJ 

A. tifirjv 



Sing. 

N. TToXlTTjg 

G. noliiov 
D. nollii] 
A. tioIIttjv 
V. TioXlra 



o vsaviag, the 
youth. 

Sing. 
N. vsaviag 
G. vtavlov 
D. vsavict 
A. vsaviav 
V. vwvia 



* Nouns in tins, and a few others, make the Vocative Singular in *}, as 
'Ar^uiru. Arxrrvs makes » or a. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 25 

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual, 

N. A. V. S6*a N. A. V. xifiu N. A. V. ttoUtcc N.A. V. vsavla 

G. D. dol-aiv G. D. xifiouv G. D. noViiaiv G. D. vsavlaiv 

Plural. Plural. Plural. Plural. 

N. do^ccL N. Tifial N. noXi.Tv.i N. vsavicu 

G. do!-a)V G. jificov G. tioIitwv G. veuviwv 

D. do'Sa*? D. tifxoug D. TtoMxaiq D. vsavlaig 

A. (SoSae A. rifidg A. nolhag A. vsavlag 

V. doi-at V. T^tat V. 7ro^T«i V. viavlai. 

§ 14. EXERCISES ON THE FIRST 
DECLENSION. 

1. English into Greek. 
^ mwse. 0/* a mt/se. 0/" /Ae wmse. .Fbr ^e 
wwse. TTie muses. Of the muses. The house. 
The house of the muses. The friendship of the 
muses. The honor of the house. Grief (fi Ivitif). 
The grief of the youth. The soul of the poet. 
The voice of honor. The door of the house. 
Doors of houses. The voices of the poets. The 
voice of friendship. Of the voices of friendship. 
With the tongues (rat? yXaaacus) of the poets. 
Of the shadow of the house. Of the shadows of 
the houses. 

Remark 1. The genitive is often placed 
between the noun and article on which it is 
dependent ; thus, r\ jyjs oixias dyad, the shadow 
of the house ; r\ irjs Xyn-qs ahta, the cause of 
grief. 

Rem. 2. With abstract nouns, as names of 
virtues, vices, &c, the article is employed or 

2* 



26 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

omitted at pleasure ; as drunkenness, r) [xidn or 
liidii, friendship, rj cptXta or cpilia. 

2. Greek into English. 
a and rj. 
C II dvga Tijs olxiag. Trjg cpcovi\g tSv Movacov. 
C H jijg yjv%rjg impikua. c H dydnn Trjg Tipr}?. 
e H elgijvng cpcovij. II £a?j zrjs vjv%rjg. A I axial 
tcjv vecpsXcov. Ao^ai xal IniQv^iiai xal ridovai. 
c H dgeTrjg ridovij. c H dg%i} £arjs. Ilriyrj Trjg 
oocpiag. Al oixiai Trjg xco^trig. At xcofiac Trjg 
%cogag. Al %cogat zijg yrjg. c II xopj Trjg xscpa- 
hjg. Tjj cpcovfj Trjg figovTijg. Trjg yscpvgag xal 
Trjg daXdaorig. 

a? and rig. 

c O d£67ioTiig Trjg olxiag. ° H vixr\ rav HsgaSv. 
Ol vavxai Trig QaXdaa-qg. c H xagdia tov ?tgo- 
ooxov. f H xXsTtzov oiyij. Ol OTgazicoTai tov 
MikTidSov. Tov HvOaydgov fxadiiTov. c H 
ATgsid&v 6gyr\. € H dXxrj tov veaviov. Q H gco- 
ixrj tcov dOfaiTav. ' H dxTrj dakdaaiig. c H vea- 
viov Ttatdsia. 

Remark. The Greeks frequently omit the 
article, where the English idiom requires it, 
provided its omission creates no obscurity ; 
thus, the country of the king, r) %^Q a T °v P ac(l - 
Xicog, or r) %coga Paoilscog, or ?/ fiaOiXecog /coga, 
r) xXivtxov oiyij, the silence of the thief or of a 
thief 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 27 

§ 15. 'Em and 2JT. 

Sing, Sing. 

N. syd, I N. ov, thou 

G. ffiov or [iov, of me G. gov, of thee 

D. f/Aol or pol, to ox for me D. aoi, to or for thee 

A. ipd or ^5, we A. as, thee 

Dual. Dual. 

N. A. vwi, vo), we two N. A. acpS'i, ocpco, you two [two 

G. D. vco'iv, vajv, of or £0 us two G. D. oywiv, oyotv, of ox to you 

Plural. Plural. 

N. rifinq, we N. vfislg, you 

G. rj^iwv, of us G. vfibiv, of you 

D. 17^, £0 ox for us D. i^u^, /o yow 

A. T^as, ws A. ifioig, you. 

Exercises. 

1. English into Greek. 

Of me. Forme. Me. Of us. To us. We. 

Us. Thou. You. Of thee. Of you. We 
two. You two. The house of me (my house). 

The head of thee (thy head), ?/ xecpaXri aov. 

Thy voice. My heart (xagStu). Of my life. 

Of our lives. Our region. Of our houses. Of 
my houses. 

2. Greek into English. 

C H ylcoGdd pov. Ai yXatioai fyicov. c H im- 
Ovfiia zijs xagdias [iov. c O Beotcoiijs ttJs %agas 
ijficov. Ot dsanotcu fjficov. c H fjdov?] jf f 9 cpihias 
aov. ' H %agd zrjs ipv%rjs [xov. ' O fiadi^rifs dov. 
C H dg%tf rrjs ^coijs [iov. 



28 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Examples with eivcu, to be (see ^61), and 
Prepositions (^ 75). 

"Egtl (there is) Ovga iv rij olxta. C H fxidn 
pavia ioTLV. c H ay amy rfjs elgijvns itiiiv iv Tjj 
xagdta [iov. e H XvTtn idrlv iv xagdiaig vjacov. 
Ovx ix nevlas iozl Xvtcij dXX 9 i| iTttdv^iiag. C H 
(piXagyvgia iaxl gt£a rrjs xaxias. *Ex rfjs dgs- 
Tr(S i(JiLv evdaipovia. c H dgeri] xai ?) docpia 
Zed?) Tij? ywxrjg itinv. c O xXe7ZT7j? iariv iv t?J 
oixia. c H <piXia iaxi irr^yij ijSovijs. c H axyjvq 
[iov idle nagd ti\v QaXacaav. 3 JEv rjj ivroXjj dov 
idle %v>gd {.iov. 

Remark 1. Our indefinite article is indicated 
in Greek by the absence of the article ; as, 
Ovga, a door, 

2. In Greek the predicate generally omits 
the article ; as, ?) ^fiiga rv§ iysvsro, the day 
became night ; i) vv£ i/fisga iysvsro, the night 
became day ; t) fxsOn (.iavia iozLv. But if the 
predicate is more limited than the subject, it 
may take the article ; as, *bioovs i\v 6 vlos rov 
Qeov, Jesus was the son of God, (it being sup- 
posed there was but one son of God.) 

3. In Greek, as in Latin, two singular nouns 
united by the conjunction xai, (and,) take a 
verb either in the singular or plural; as, upi} 
xai dgtTi] iaxiv or eioiv. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 29 

§ 16. CONTRACTS OF THE FIRST 
DECLENSION. 

'Egkct iga, igiag igas, igia igcl, igeav igav, 
&,c. 

Fake?] yakrj, yali-qs yaXip, yakey yciXjj, &,c. 

§ 17. SECOND DECLENSION. 

1. Characteristic vowel o, lengthened by the 
Attics in some words into co. The nominative 
attaches s for the masculine, v for the neuter; 
hence os and cog, masculine, (sometimes femi- 
nine,) ov and cov neuter. 
2. Singular. 

o (speech) to (work) o (temple) to (hall) 
zqyov 
Eqyov 
sgytn 
Eqyov 
Eqyov 

Dual. 
I'qya) 
tqyoLV 

Plural, 
i'qya 
Eqyoav 
i'qyoig 
Eqyv. 
sgya 

So xoopog, world, ccv&gwTiog, man, &eog, God, ijXiog, sun, 
§log, life, ocpdodpog, eye, vlog, son, vopog, law, nXomog, wealth, 
dojgov, gift, dsvdqov, tree, cpvXXov, leaf, nsdtov, plain, (xhqov, 
measure, £wov, animal, texvov, child, ayyelog, messenger, no- 
rafiog, river, noXtfiog, war. 



N. 


Xoyog 


G. 


Xcyov 


D. 


Xoyca 


A. 


Xoyov 


V. 


Xoys 


N.A.V. X6yco 


G. D. 


Xoyoiv 


N. 


Xoyoi 


G. 


Xoyojv 


D. 


Xoyoig 


A. 


Xoyovg 


V. 


Xoyoi 



vscog 


CCVCOyEGJV 


VE(ti 


avcoyECO 


VE(p 


arwysq) 


veoov 


ctvcoyswv 


VEwg 


avwyEav 


VE(6 


avwyEG) 


VECpV 


avojyEcov 


VE(S 


avwyEto 


VE03V 


avcoysav 


VEcog 


avcoysmg 


VEc6g 


ccvcoyEO) 


vsa 


av(6yE(o. 



30 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

3. Exercises on the Second Declension. 

a) A word. Of a word. With a icord 
(Xoycp). The icord. Of the words. The word 
of God. The ivords of the man. The icorks of 
God. The life of man. The leaves of the trees. 
Jl leaf of a tree. The leaves of a tree. Of the 
leaves of the trees. Of the trees of the forest 
(yhj). The eye of the man. The ways (r) boos) 
of the rivers. 

b) The sun is the eye of the world. Man is 
an animal. The law of the Lord is in my heart. 
Thou art the son of God. Wealth is a gift of 
God. There is (tan) a tree near the river. 
The eye of the Lord (xvqios) is upon the earth. 
The voice of the Lord is in the earth. The sun 
is in the clouds (vscpiXv). The sun is thy mes- 
senger. The river of death (O&voltos). The 
leaves of the tree of life (£&ij). The river of life 
is from (ix, out of) the throne (Ogovos) of God. 

4. Greek into English. 

c O vofios tov Osov. c O Xoyos etScoXov idxi 
tijs ipv/ljs. c H AiyvitTos Scjqov loxi tov Nei- 
Xov. Hapd tols AlyvTCxiois 6 ijXios xal i) Gehrj- 
vij ® a0i tlGlv ' Ev cuqxV V v o hoyos xal 6 ).6yos 
t)v nagd tw 6sa. Td nXold fxov iv xrj OaXdaar^ 
ear iv. c O vtzvos icnlv ddskyos tov Oavdxov. 

OtVOS iOTL xdTOTlTQOV TOV VOV. 01 aVE^Ol XCU 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



31 



q OdXadCfOL BovXol slaiv dvdgconcov. *Eyco slpi 
diddctxaXos, av [uxdrjirfs. *Ev otvco idrlv dXijOaia. 
c O cp66os tov Kvgtov idzlv dg%rj jrjs aocpias. 
c O %govos iorlv ogyrjs (pdgpaxov. * Ev tq 2Jlxs- 
Xia iozlv 3 ^(pgoScrris vecos. 

§ 18. CONTRACTS. 

N. voos (mind) vovs, G. voov vov, D. vocp vS, 
A. voov vovv, V. vos vov. Dual, voco vco, vooiv 
volv. PL VOOl vol, vocov vav, VOOIS VOLS, &c. 

*Ootsov octovv (bone), baxiov ootov, ocnicp 
otiTco, oaxsov ogtovv. Dual, ogteco 6gt6, bcxioiv 
ogtolv. PL oOTsa dard, otiziav dozav, Slc. 



§ 19. ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS 
IN OZ, H, ON. 

1. These have in the Feminine the termina- 
tions of the first declension (a or ??), in the 
Masculine and Neuter those of the second 
(os, ov). 



Singular. 
N. ooq>-6g, v\, ov 
G. oocp-ov, i]g, ov 
D. oocp-v, fj, <y 
A. ooqp-ov, r\v, ov 
V. oocp-t, 1], ov 



JZocpog, wise. 

Dual. 

N.A.V. ooqp-co, d, to 

G. D. O0(p-o1v, cuv, 

[dlv 



Plural. 
N. oocp-oi, etc, a 

G. GO(f~(x)V, (OV, wv 

D. oocp-o7g, cug, otg 
A. oocp-ovg, ctg, a 
V. ooqp-oi, al, a. 



2. Adjectives in os pure, and gos, make the 
Feminine in a ; as, (pthos, a, ov • (iixgos, d, ov. 



32 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



Singula?'. 
N. cpiXi-og, a, ov 
G. cpiXl-ov, ctg, ov 
D. cpill-o), a, o) 
A. cpiXi-ov, av, ov 
V. qpiXi-s, u, ov 



ftlXiog, friendly. 

Dual. 

N.A.V. cpiXl-w, a, w 

G. D. cpiXi-oiv, aiv. 



Plural. 

| N. cplXi-oi, ai, a 

G. (plkl-OJV, 0)V, (OV 

D. qnXi-oig, aig, oig 
A. cpiM-ovg, ag, a 
V. (flXi-oi, at, a. 



Exc. Adjectives in oos make 7/ in the femi- 
nine ; and adjectives in eos and oos are con- 
tracted ; as, xqvgsos %qv<&vs 9 %QVG>sa %Qvctr}, 
Xqvoeov ygvtiovv ■ hnXoos dnXovs, ajiXoi] dizXrj, 
anXoov anXovv, &c. 

3. Compound adjectives, and many others in 
os, have but two endings, and belong exclu- 
sively to the second declension. 

3 A&dvaxog, immortal. 



Singular. 
N. r\ ct&draxoc, to a&dvaxov 
G. xov xr]g xov u&avdxov 
D. tw xf] xo) d&avdxo) 
A. xov xi)v xo a&dvaxov 
V. d&dvaxE, aOavaxov 



Plural. 

N. ol a\ a&di'axoi, xd a&dvaxoc 
G. xoJv xwv x(x>v d&avdxcov 
D. xolg xalg xolg u&uvdxoig 
A. xovg xug xu aOdvaxa 
V. d&dvaxoi, addvaxa. 

Dual. 
N. A. V. tcu xd xw d&ardxco 
G. D. xolv xalv xolv a&avdxoiv. 



% 20. EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVES 
IN 02J. 

1. Adjectives in os, ?/, ov, c/?uZ 0?, a, ov. *Aya- 
66s (piXos. JJocpos avQgcoTCos. c O xaAds xoopos. 
c O Xol(A7Zq6s ijlios. Tcov dyadcov (ptXcov. Ol m- 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 33 

0tol SovXoi. Ovnid £aa. Maxgd odog. Mixgd 
Tgdns^a. IlXovjog okiyog. IlvXn tirsvrf. Azv- 
xal tcetqoli. Aidog £sgtos. Aocpog %a\z7tog. 

Qiyoavgog ioav 6 7110x65 cpikog. c O aocpos 
avOgconos ion fiaxdgtog. c O xaigog vfxcov iortv 
dsl sioi[AOs. Kaxog j3tog ioxlv ovdinozs fxaxd- 
giog. J ] Eoxiv iv xapjj rifxcov dixaoitfg cpgovi^iog. 
c O Urfyaoog innog t^v Ttxnvog. Uvdayogag ?jv 
XTLOiTfs rrjg cpiXooocpias Trjs Arafaxrjg. ' H (isdy 
[Mxgd \iavia ioxiv. * H odog etg "Aidov ioil nav- 
Ta%ov biioia. C H dgerrjg odog to ngcoTOv (at 
first) xaXsmj iortv, voregov Si gadta. C H %coga 
€%£L (has) txavrjv (pvXaxijv. Zaijg novngdg rs- 
Xevrrf ion Odvarog novngog. ' SI Tttorrj ipv%?j t 

2. Adjectives in og of two endings. c O nXov- 
Tog ioTL Ovwrog, fj do£a dddvarog. c O Ovfios 
dXoytorog. Jstkov 6 nXovrog xal (piX6ipv%ov 
xaxov. Avxco xal itctzco Ovvvofia iorov. KaXov 
if dXjjdsta xal [xovtfiov. C H 2JtxeXta iorl vrjoog. 
noXvdvdgcoTCog. c O Oeog iortv dykvvr(iog. Ov- 
div iorl fiifiatov iv ra j3ta tw dvOgconiva. 

Remarks. 1. When the noun is accompanied 
by an article, the adjective is placed between 
the article and noun, as, 6 dyadog dvdgcoTtog, 
the good man, or follows both, with the article 
repeated, as, 6 dvdgcoTtog 6 dyadog. c O dvdgco- 
nog dyadog, or dyadog b dvdgcoTtog, could only 
be read with iorl understood, the man is good. 
'EjtotwGa rqv olxiav ri\y xaXiqv, or ivzotwoa rijy 
3 



34 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

xakijv olxlav, I made the beautiful house ; but 
inoujoa ti}v oixlav xafajv, I made (i. e. render- 
ed) the house beautiful. 

2. So the possessive pronouns epos, mine, 
60s, thine, vfiitsgos, yours, &c. ; as, 6 ipos 8ov- 
Aos, or 6 dovkog 6 iuos, a more emphatic form 
for 6 Sovkos fiov, my servant. c O aos vovs to gov 
(jS^cc psTa%siQL£eTou, thy mind controls thy body. 

3. The verb elvat is often omitted ; as, 6 Ov- 
[aos (eotlv) aloyiOTos. The adjective is often 
put in the neuter, agreeing with a noun under- 
stood ; as, i) ivgavvis dcpaXegov iazc, supreme 
power is a dangerous thing (x9W a )- 

§21. ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS 
IN OZ, H, O. 

The adjectives aXXos, toiovtos, tooovtos, and 
rnhxovzos, and the pronouns os, avrog, ixuvos, 
ovtos, have the Nom. Neut. Sing, in o. Thus, 

aXXog, another. 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 

N. uXX-oi, «t, a 

G. aXX-biV, (or, (iw 

D. uXX-oig, aig, oig 

A. uXX-ovg, ag, a. 

So uviog, ipse, self, exuvog, Hie, he, bg, who. 



N. aXX-og, r\, o I N.A.V. aXX-a, a, (a 

G. uXX-ov, r\g, ov G. D. aXX-oiv, cav, 

D. aXX-oj, y, « [on 

A. uXX-ov, v\v, o J 



$ 22. EXERCISES ON 3 AAAOZ. 

1. s AKkos without the article means in the 
sing, another, in the plural, others. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 35 

2. With the article, it means in the singular, 
the remaining part, in the plural, ol allot, the 
rest (ceteri). 

3. The other, in the singular, 6 hsgos. 

4. Examples. * ' Ally\ #»oa, another country; 
i) iriga #«oa, the other country ; r) allri %aga, 
the rest of the country ; allai x®Q a h other coun- 
tries (some others) ; at dllai %cqq(u, the rest of 
the countries. ™ Alio SsvSgoy, another tree ; ro 
alio 8sv8gov, the rest of the tree ; to Srsgov 
8ev8gov, the other tree; alia 8kv8ga, other trees; 
rd alia 8ev8ga, the rest of the trees. So, a day 
(fffxega), another day, the other day, the rest of 
the day, the rest of the days, other days. 

So otzia, a house, dygos, a field. 

% 23. "ATT02. 

1. Avros with the article means always the 
same (idem) ; as, 6 avros tokos, the same place ; 
iv t<5 avvcp TOTtco, in the same place ; rd avid 
ngdyfiaxa, the same things ; rcov avrcov ngay^id- 
tcov, of the same things. 

2. Avros without the article, in the nomina- 
tive always, and in the oblique cases when fol- 
lowed by a noun, signifies self (ipse) ; as, avros 
iyco, I myself; avros <pqfU 9 I myself assert ; av- 
ros 6 dvdgonos, the man himself ; rov avOgcoitov 
avrov, or avrov rov dvdgconov, of the man him- 
self. 



36 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

3. Standing alone in the oblique cases, it is 
the demonstrative pronoun him, her, it; as, 6 
Oeos xcd zd egya avTov, God and the tcorks of 
him (his works) ; 6 xoopos xcd toc iv awco, the 
world and the things in it ; iv avTco rp> £wj, in 
him was life. 

\ 24. 'OTTOS and "EKEIN02. 

1. 'JExsivos (from ixst, their), signifies that 
person there, he (ille). 

2. Oifxos (from 6 and avros,) signifies this 
(hie), this person, and follows in its inflexion 
the article. 

Singular. Plural. 

N. ovrog, amrj, tovto N. ovtoi, uvtul, tuvtu 

d tovtov, raving, tovtov G. tovtcov, tovtcov, tovtcov 

D. TOVZCO, TUVTT], TOVTO) D. TOVTOig, TUVTUig, TOVTOig 

A. TOVTOV, TUVt7]V, TOVTO A. TOVTOVg, TUVTUg, TUVTU 

Dual 

N. A. TOVIW, TUVTU, TOVICO 

G. D. TOVTOIV, TUVTUlVy TOVTOIV. 

3. Otfjos and ixstvos stand either before both 
the substantive and its article, or after both ; 
as, ovzos 6 avOgcojtos, this man ; tcov dvOgconcov 
tovtcov, of these men ; iv ixslvrj tj} rf^sgcf, in that 
day ; listm ti)v agav ixBlvijv, after that hour. 

% 25. EXERCISES ON "AAAOZ, *AT- 
TOJJ/ OTTO 2, &c. 

3l£Ta tov OdvaTov ifticov idTiv vluv aXlos fiios. 
Maxdgios idTiv 6 SovXos ixelvos. c H fiaoiXsia 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 37 

i} spy} ovx laxiv ex tov xodjxov tovtov. Uaga 
ravT-qv zrjv %cogav laxlv 6 7tOTa(x6s. Tovto Imiv 
o vopos xal ol TigocpfJTai. Ol aXXot dTgaTiaiai 
r\6av iv t£ avxto ronco. Tavzd laxiv dyadd. 
Td Saga Tr)s rvx^s stirl dcpaXsgd, xal avx-q ian 
TvcpXq xal xcocp-q. c O diSdaxaXos avios xal ol 
[xadqTai avxov fjaav iv xfj avjjj aioa. 'Eya E%a 
(have) TTJv avxr}v yva^v col (the same senti- 
ment with thee; 6 ccvtos, the same, takes the 
Dative after it, as in Lat. idem the Ablative 
with cum). 

§ 26. THIRD DECLENSION,* 

1. The third declension has as radical letters, 
to which its terminations are attached (see 
^11), the mutes n, x, t, /3, y, d, qo, %, 0, the li- 
quids A, v, g, and the vowels s, t, v, a. Roots in 
a belong to the first declension, roots in o to 
the second, except a few which, in the singu- 
lar, follow the third. 

2. The Nominative regularly assumes a. The 
liquids, however, do not generally take it, and 
many of the mutes (especially neuter roots in 
t), instead of attaching a and dropping the t, 
omit both ; thus, root ngayiiax, Norn, ngdy^ia 
(reg. itgdy^as), root [aeXlt, N. piiki (reg. fxi?us), 
Roots in ovx (reg. opts, ovs, as odovr, odovs) 

* Before commencing this declension, the student should make himself 
perfectly familiar with the principles, in §§ 3 and 4. 

3* 



38 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

generally drop the t and make the Nominative 
in ov ; as, Xsovt, Xicov. So all participles in av. 

3. The student, then, will be careful not to 
confound the nominative with the root, in de- 
ciding to what class a noun belongs ; e. g. 
TtQaypa and most nouns in a have a root in a 
mute consonant ; many nouns in cov, a root in 
ovt ; some a root in ov, as Saificdv, root SaTpov. 
The first object should always be, to ascertain 
the root (which may be found from either of 
the oblique cases except the Voc. Sing, and 
Dat. Plur.), as the terminations are directly 
attached to this. 

4. MUTE NOUNS. 

Root, {r^Xa^ndd (to) nqdy^ax (o) xoqux (o) odovx 

Sing. 

N. X(/.t.i7id(<$)-g 7to«^/«(t) xuQMx-g(x6ga$)odovg 

G. Xit[xndd-og 7iQuyn<tT-og xoQUx-og odurx-og 

D. Xaj.tndd-1 Tiod/fxaT-L xoqax-i odovx-i 

A. Xafxndd-a TiQU/fAa x6(j<xx-cc cdovx-a 

V. Xaixndg 7i(j<x/[ict x6qu$ odovg 

Dual 

N.A.V.Xafmdd-e TiQayfiax-s xoqcxx-s odorx-s 

G. D. Xafxndd-otv TTQaytidr-oiv xoqdx-oiv odoix-oiv 

Plur. 

N. Xafindd-tg nqdyiiax-a xoqux-zg odovx-eg 

G. Xufindd-wv TiQayfxdi-wv xcqux-mv odoix-wv 

D. Xa/ATid(d)-ai nody^u(x)-OL x6y<x$i 6d6ri(odov)-oi 

A. Xu/ATidd ug TiQdy(xui-u xoQux-ug odon-ixg 

V. XafiTidd-sg 7iQdyuax-a xogax-fg odoi'T-tg. 

5. Roots in it, id, id, vd, with the acute ac- 
cent on the penult, have the Ace. Sing, both in 
a and v ; as, %aQis (%ccqit), ^aotra, and /ccgiv 
xoqvs (xoqvO), xogvOa, and xogvv. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 39 

6. The student will easily explain the changes 
in Mute Nouns (as, 68ovs from 686vt, vvj- from 
vvxt), by recurring to the general principles in 
§ 4. Many roots, however, make their nom- 
inative entirely irregularly ; as, vSar (reg. Nom. 
v8as), vScoq, vdaros, &>c. ; yovaj, knee, (reg. 
Nom. yovas,) yovv, yovazos ' yvvaix, woman, 
(reg. Nom. yvvaiQ yvvrf, yvvaixos, Voc. yvvai • 
ydlaxr, milk, (reg. Nom. ydla^,) yala, ydla- 
tctos ' i]7tax, N. ijTtag. 

7. The vocative sometimes throws off a ; as, 
nuts (root TtatS), V. nat. Many nouns in vt 
drop the t and make the vocative in v ; as, 
AZolvt (N. Aias), Voc. Alav. Some proper 
nouns drop also the ^ ; as, "Arkavz (N. 3 '^- 
tAccs), Voc. "AiXd. 

§ 27. LIQUID NOUNS. 

1. Root, (o) diupov (6) ipccQ (Jo) (jiilav (6) c 'EXXi]v (o) n are q 

Sing. 

N. 8nl/A(ov ipdcQ (xiXn(v)-g "jEXXyv ncn^Q [tQog 

G. datfiov-og ipuq-og fisXav-og c> EXXr)v-og naxio-og, na- 

D. dat'fiov-i ipaQ-l [iiXav-i "EXXqv-t naxiq-i, nargi 

A. dtxlpov-a xjj(xo-a [xiXuv-a "EXXrjv-a narsQ-a 

V. dulfiov \pag {isXag "EXXqv ttoctsq 

Dual. 

N.A.V.dcdfiov-e xpuQ-e [isXav-s "EXXtjv- s TiartQ-e 

G. D. dtxtfiov-oiv yitQ-oiv {i&Xav-ow *EXXr\v-oiv naiiq-oiv 

Piur. 

N. dalfxov-sg yixg-fg {iiXav-£g "EXXrji'-sg nattq-tg 

G. diu/iav-tav ipao-aiv [itXuv-wv 'EXXriv-wv tuxtsq-mv 

D. dixlfxo{i') at tpao-ol (jtX<i(r)-Gi"EXXr]-ai natgd-ai 

A. §ixr'fio'-ag yao-ag t usXav-ag 'EXXqv-ag naTtQ-ag 

V. dal/uov-eg (/;«£-{£ [itXav-sq "EXXrjv-tg naTtQ-eg. 



40 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Like naiijQ, father, are declined (i^Ti]g, mother, ■&vyaTfjg, 
daughter, yaoTi]g, stomach, except Dat. PI. yaoiijgoi. 3 Avr\g, 
a man, (root, avig,) syncopates e and inserts d to smooth the 
pronunciation ; as, avrjg, G. avigog, avgog avdgog, D. avigi 
ttvSgl, Ace. aviga ocvdga, &/C, Dat. PI. avdgdai. 

2. Remarks on Liquid JYouns. As Liquid 
Nouns do not commonly add a in the nomina- 
tive, they frequently lengthen the radical vowel 
as above. So noi^ikv^ noipijv • gfjiog, g^rag. 
Neuters retain the short vowel ; as, rjrog, i\to- 
gos. Some are already long ; as, r EXl^y-os, 
aicov-os. 

3. There are no roots in p, and but one in 
A, viz. aXs (root aA), the sea. 

4. The vocative is usually like the root. 

§28. PURE NOUNS. 

1. These suffer many contractions by the 
contact of the vowel of the ending with that of 
the root, and are otherwise more changed than 
nouns with mute and liquid roots. Few of 
them, however, are contracted in all the cases 
which admit contraction. Pure roots end in a, 
t, o, v, a few in co, and three or four in a. 

2. They generally attach a for the Nomina- 
tive. 

3. Roots in e. 
These lengthen s into r/ in the nominative of 
masculine and feminine nouns. In neuters, s is 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



41 



changed into the stronger o, except in neuter 
adjectives, which retain e. They contract most 
of their oblique cases. 



Root, rgirjoE 


aXrj&i 


TSIX8 


Sing, a galley. 


true. 


a wall. 


N. (ji) rgir}Q-7jg 


(to) aXtj&ig 


(to) Tuxog 


G. T<jiiqQ-zoQ, ovg 


aXt}&-sog, ovg 


xux-Eog, ovg 


D. TQirJQ-s'i, a 


a\r]&-£'l, u 


Tslx-s'h si* 


A. TQlTjQ-ECC, -7] 


ccXr]&eg 


Ts7xog 


V. TQirjgsg 


akrj&eg 


Tslxog 


Dual. 






N.A.V.TQirjg-SE, t\ 


aXr)&-ie, 7) 


Tslx-SE, 7] 


G. D. XQ17]Q-E01V, OiV 


aXt]&-ioiv, otv 


TEIX-E01V, OiV 


Plur. 






N. TQirjQ-esg, sig 


aXrj&-ea, 7) 


TEfy-EOC, 7] 


G. tqitjq-ewv, oov 


aXri&-E(av, gov 


teix-ecov, (av 


D. TQirjQ-EGl 


aXri&-ioi 


teIx-eoi 


A. TQiijg-eag, Eig 


ccXt]&-s'a, r\ 


tecx-ecc, 7] 


V. TQllJQ-SEg, tLg 


aX7]&-sa, 7) 


TeIx-EU, 7]. 



Exc. Many masculine nouns in s, instead of 
lengthening e into ??, insert v, probably from the 
ancient digamma ; thus, fiactilsFs, softened /3a- 
cilevs, Dat. PI. fiaaihsvciL. The Attics here 
make the Gen. Sing, in as. 



Sing. 6 {king) 
N. ftaoiXsvg 
G. fiaatXiwg 
D. (iaoiX-E'L, e% 
A. fiaoiXiu 
V. ficcoiXEV 



Dual. 
N. A. V. paoiX-Es 
G. D. fiaoiX-EOLV 



4. Roots in 1. 



Plural. 

N. ftaaiXEEg, sig 

G. ftttOlX-SOdV 

D. ftaaiXEvai 
A. fiaGiX-iag, Eig 
V. ftaaiX-EEg, Elg. 



These change t, in most feminine nouns, into 
s, in all cases except the Nom., Ace, and Voc. 
Sing. In the Gen. Sing, these have cos, in the 
Dual, cpv. The Ace. Sing, ends in v. 



42 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 







Root x/. 






Singular. 




Z>«aZ. 


Plural. 




N. (o) nig 


N. 


A. V. xl-e 


N. Xt-fC 




G. xi-6g 




G, D. xt-otv 


G. XL-WV 




D. Xtr-i 






D. xt-ff/ 




A. Y.VV 






A. xt-a? 




V. xig 




Root UoXl. 


V. X£-£?. 




Singular. 




Dual 


Plural 




N. (?;) 7ro'A/? 


N 


A. V. notes 


N. 7ToX-f£?, 


m 


G. noXtcaq 




G. D. noXsmv 


G. xroAftov 




D. noXs'i, tioXsl 






D. noXsoi 




A. WAiv 






A. 7ro'A-fa?, 


n$ 


V. 7roAt 






V. noX-esg, 


tig. 



Neuters in i do not attach a for the nomina- 
tive ; (Sivriiti -eos, -s'C si, oivrim, &c. 

5. Roots in o. 

These in the nominative lengthen o into o, 
and part of them omit a ; as, ?) aldas (alSo), 
shame ; ij fya (^o), echo. The Dual and Plu- 
ral follow the second declension. 

N. aidas, G. atdoog alSovs, D. atdot aidot, A. 
aldoa alda, V. atdoi. N. igjriS, G. ?^o'os r[%QV$, 
D. $#ot ^ot, A. ?fco'a ^6, V. ?fcot. 

Anomalous is /3ovs (root /3o, with digamma, 
/30'Js, /3oi/s, Lat. 60s, bovis, <Slc), G. f$o-6s, D. 
/3o-t, A. /3ow, V. j3ov. Plur. /3o'fs /3o2/s, G. ftocov, 
D. fiovai, A. /3oas ($ov$, V. /3o'£s. 

6. /*W$ in v. 

Neuters reject a in the Nominative. Some 
masculines and neuters change v into s in all 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



43 



the cases except the JNom., Ace, and Voc. Sing. 
The Ace. Sing, ends in v. 



Root, 


(6) ($OTQV 




(to) ddxgv 


(o) nsXsxv 


(rb) aarv 


Sing. 


grape 




tear 


axe 


city 


N. 


fioTQVQ 




ddxgv 


nsXsxvg 


aarv 


G. 


fioTQVoq 




dnxgvog 


nsXsxscog 


OLGTE-OQ & tag 


D. 


fioTQV'i 




odxQv'i 


nsXsx-s'i, Si 


ctOT-e'i, si 


A. 


fioiQVV 




ddxgv 


niXsxvv 


aorv 


V. 


ftoTQV 




daxgv 


niXsxv 


aarv 


Dual 












N.A.V./Jot^vs 




ddxgvs 


nsXsxss 


aaiss 


G.D. 


fioTQVOlV 




daxgvoiv 


nsXsxsoiv 


aoTsoiv 


Plural. 










N. 


fiorgv-sg, 


vg 


ddxgvcc 


nsXsx-ssg, sig 


OtGTS-Ot, 7] 


G. 


fioTQVCJV 




daxgvcav 


nsXsxs-av 


CCO T SCO V 


D. 


(30TQV(U 




SdxgVGl 


nsXsxsoi 


aoTsoi 


A. 


fioTQV-ag, 


vg 


ddxgvct 


TtsXsx-sag, sig 


a or sot, aatTj 


V. 


fioTQV-sg, vg 


ddxgva 


nsXsx-ssg, sig 


ccois-a, 7]. 



7. Roots in a. 

Nominative adds a. 6 66s, jackal, G. dcoos, 
D. 6ot, A. 66a, V. 66s, Dual 66e, 66otv, PL 
66es, G. 66cov, D. 6aai, A. 66as, V. 66es. 

8. Anomalous. 

There are two nouns of this declension, from 
roots in a with the digamma. 

f) vavs, a ship, (root va, vaFs, va^, Lat. na- 
vis,) G. ve6s, D. vnt, A. vavv, V. vav, Dual 
vrjs, veolv, PL vijss, vs6v, vaval, vuvs, vijss. 

tj ygavs, an old woman, (root yga, ygaFs, 
ygavs,) G. ygaos, D. ygat, A. ygavv, V. ygav. 
PL N. V. ygass ygavs, G. ygaav, D. ygavci, 
A. ygaas ygavs. 



44 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

§ 29. EXERCISES ON THE THIRD 
DECLENSION. 

1. Mute and Liquid Nouns. 
c O dycov tov Xeovtos xal tcov xvvcov. 'Ev t« 
cfTopaTi tov xoXaxog Iotlv log. c H Tvgavvlg ddi- 
xiag p/T^o ioiiv. c O dsthog rijs naTgiSog ngodo- 
Trfs iaztv. Ol dyadol dvSgsg Osav slxoveg slow. 
c O dsog ion cpm. Td ngdy^iaTa tuv dvdgcov 
ioiiv iv x E 9 at T ® v duipdvoov. c H asXijvq xal ol 
dojsges slot Xapjiddsg Tijg vvxTog. c O Zsvg i\v 
7iaTi}g t6v 8ai[x6vcdv xal dva% dvdgcov. * H dcpgo- 
Ovvq to eg dvOgccnioig 2J(piy§ ioTtv. Trj yaOTegi 
ovx sOTiv d)Ta. 

2. Pure Nouns. 
Nvv 1(jti xgcaig tov xocpov tovtov. Uagd 
TOig ' ' EXh\div sxlxtov -qoav Tgcrjgeig. c H qpvdLS 
oivev [.laOijdscos ioTi TvcpXov. c O NzlXog e%et 
(has) TtavToia /ivy l/Ovcov. Kigdrf novi^gd 
IdTiv asl fyfjiia. XolXztzov to yqgdg idTiv dvdga- 
noig fidgos. c H Mavdavij i^v ' AdTvdyovs dv- 
yaTr/g, fiaoiXias tcov Mi'fiav. H^co iciTi dvyd- 
Tijg Tijg dg{.iov tag. ' Eotl nXijOog tcjv fioTgvav iv 
Totg d^nteX(D6Lv fyicov. Td Tuyr\ Trjs noXscog 
Iotlv vvjijXd xal LO%vgd. 

3. Promiscuous Exercises on the Third 
Declension. 

' O OdvaTog ioTt SidXvdis tt(S \}w/rjs xal tov 
dcofiazog. c Sis ol doTtgeg scctlv ovgavov xoGfiog, 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 45 

ovtos ol olxqTogss xlios zrjs nolscos. Tovtq 
iaxiv bveidos ddavazov. To %icpo$ sgtlv iv toXv 

%SQOLV TTjS [ITjTQOS. Ol OCpSIS TOV IOV Iv TOlS 

odovoiv s%ov(jiv (have). *Ev Boicoticl dvo iciTiv 
iitiorj^ia 6027, to fiiv (the one) KiOaigav, to 8i 
(the other) ' EXixav. C H ic%vs tcov dsikcov iaxiv 
iv nooi. r Htfav tcevts Tgujgsis iv Xifiivi ixeivcp. 
"OnXov Xiovaiv iaxiv dXxtf, ravgois xigaza, tols 
avdgdoi Xoyos xal oocpla. 

% 30. EXERCISES IN ALL THE DE- 
CLENSIONS. 

1. Al xxtftfSLS rijs dgsTrjs [xovai fiiftaiai slow. 
"H Ttaidsla iv fiiv tcus si>Tv%iais xodfios iaiti/ r 
iv di tccis drv^iacs xaTCKpvyjj. Al Movtiai Aids 
xal 31vr}[A,ocivv7}s dvyaziges slow. c O Aivos r^v 
naig c Eg[xov xal Movdys Ovgavias. JTvvai^l 
xoapos rj Giyij ioiiv. Tea vzods ' Hcpaiaxov fjdav 
%cdkoL 'Agyos 6 TtavQTtT7\s efysv ofifxaxa iv oXa 
xS aSfiaxi. c H Aiyvnxos dagov ion rov Nsi- 
Xov. Hovos evxkeias naTrfg. Al <P6gxov Ov- 
yaregss rjoav ygaiai ix ysvsjijs. O 'Egfxrjs, 
Maias xal Aids wos, y\v dyyeXos tcov Oscov xal 
xrjgv£ tov noLTgos. 

2. English into Greek. 

A divinity. J king. Of a divinity. Of a 

king. Of the divinity. Of the king. Of the 

divinities. Of the kings. The son of the king. 

The father of the king. A daughter of the king., 

4 



46 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

A lion. The teeth of the lion. The light of day. 
The stars of night. The tongue of the flatterer 
(xo'Aa|). The water of life. The waters of the 
river. There are fishes in the sea. Minerva 
^AQnva) was the daughter of Jupiter (rjv Ovya- 
zijq, not i\ dvydjjjg). Latona (Ay\T&) was moth- 
er of Apollo and Diana ('Aqts(als). Io was the 
daughter of Inachus. 

§ 31. ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD 
DECLENSION. 

1. These have usually two, sometimes but one 
termination, and conform in their inflexion to 
nouns of the same ending and gender. Their 
inflexion, therefore, will create no difficulty. 

2( 6 r\ awowv. to awoov, foolish. 

( Ur. tov T?j£ tov acpQoroQ, O&C. 

So comparatives in car, except that they contract ova into 

oj, and ovsg and ovug into ovg ; as, y.u£ova (iBiQw, fisi^ovsg and 

[isl£ovag fxsl^ovg. 

o £ o r] aXrj&rjg, to aXrj&sg, true. 

' ( G. tov Ttjg tov aXij&eog aXq&ovg, &C 

. i 6 t) uggnv, to ugotv, male. 

4. tip, ev { n ' \r V J v, , o _ 

( vj. tov Ti]g tov uggsvog, O&C. 

r ^ot) i'doig, to I'dgi, skilful. 

I G. tov Ttjg tov vdgiog, &-C. 

So Tig, ivho, tI, G. Ttvog, D. tIvl, A. Tiva tI. Dual tLve, 
tIvolv. PI. Tivtg Tiva, G. tivuv, D. tloi, A. Tivag Tiva. 

6. So vg, v, G. vog, — (og, og, G. ogog, — ovg, ovv, G. odog, 
— ig, i, G. nog, — ag, av, G. uviog. 

7, Some adjectives are compounded with 
substantives, as fxaxgoxstg, long handed. Some 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 47 

in cog, as dnding, without father, and others 
have but one termination, being used only in 
the masculine and feminine. 

§ 32. EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVES OF 
TWO TERMINATIONS. 

' H yy\ (tcpaigosLSrjs iazcv. *I?7ta[iiv6vS as na- 
jgos r\v dcpavovs. ' H UixeXia sail vijctos ev(po- 
gos xal evdaificov. f O dfiadrjs TtXovaios idri ngo- 
ftarov ^gvao^iaXXov, Ovxos 6 dvrjg ty analog 
Teal d[itfTcog. Ovx dacpaXss rots Ovrfzois to vipos. 
f H Asgvaia vdga zl%zv v7tsg(Asys0ss dapa, xs- 
(paXds di ivvia, xds fiiv 6xr(o dv-qjas, t^V di 
[lictrfv dOdvarov. Evysvss nal sirysvav yovicov ! 
' O tov gijTogos Xoyos nlrfgrfs soil nudovs. 

% 33. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST 
AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 

Of this class are the following adjective and 
participial terminations. 

C nag, all, naaa, nav, (root navx, navxa, 
1. ag, aaa, av < ndvxaa, navx.) 

' G. navxog, 7idar t g, navxog. 



ag, aiva, av 



{ fielag, fisXaiva, pilar, black. 



G. [islavog, fisXalvfjg, fxiXavog. 

{TV71X03V, XVTIXOVaa, XV7ZXOV (r. XVTXXOVXy f. 
xvnxovxaa.) 
G. xvnxovxog, xvnxovayg, xvnxovxog, striking. 
So contracted forms in scov. tear s'ovaa iov, G. iovxog, &c. 
av ovaa ovv, ovvxog. 



48 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



{dsixvvg, duxv\ 
dsixvvvtaa.] 
G.deixrvvrog,( 



)g, deiitvvoa, deixvvv, (r. dsiuvwr, f. 

> '. 

dsixrvorjg, dEixvvvxog, shotting. 

C Tvq>&elg, xvcf&Eloa, xvcp&iv, (r. xvcp&Evx, 

5. fig, siaa, ev < f. xvySivxaa.) [struck. 

( G. Tvcp&eviog, xvcp&Eiorjg, xvcp&ivxog, being 

{Xaglfig, xuqUoou, %agiEv, comely, (r. %a- 
giEiX.) 
G. %ocQMVTog, %agiEGoi]g, %agiEvxog. 
So contracted forms in osig. oug oEooa oev, G. oEvxog,&LC. 
ovg ovGoa ovv, ovvxog. 

dovg, dovoa, dov, (r. dovx, dovxoa, dovT,) 
having given, 
dovxog, dovoijg, dovxog, &C. 

XEivcpcag, xExvyvta, xEXVCpog, (r. xExvcpox,) 
having struck. 

G. TETVCpOTOg, TETVCpvlag, TETVCpOTOg. 

EGTOog, EGTwoa, koxwg, (r. eaiaoTf contr. 

Editor,) standing. 
G. EOTurog, foxcoorjg, koxcoxog. 

ftga/vg, figa%E7a, figa%v, short. 
G. fiQO.%Eog, figaxslag, figa%iog. 

xigqv, xsgsiva, xsgEV, tender. 



7. ovg, ovoa, 



Jdovg, 
hai 
G. to 

. «£, via, og < 



9. ag, (ooa, wg 



10. 



vg, Eia, v 



j xigijv, xsgsi 
\ G. xigEVog, 



11. riv, ElVU, EV < . 

( Ij. xsgsvog, TEgEiV) t g, xEgEVog. 

12. As specimens of the above, we decline 
the following. 

Singular. Plural. 



N. 


nag 


naoa 


nav 




N. ndvxEg 


naoai 


nuvxa 


G. 


navxog 


ndoTjg 


navxog 




G. ndvxav 


naocov 


ndvxoiv 


D. 


nuvxl 


naGTj 


navxl 




D. ndoi 


ndouig 


nuot, 


A. 


TXUVXU 


ndoav 


nav 




A. navxag 


ndoag 


ndvxa 


V. 


nag 


nuoa 


nav 




V. ndviEg 


naoai 


ndvxa 










Dual. 










N. A. 


V. ndvxE 


naoa ndvxs 








G. D. 


ndvxoiv ndaaiv ndvxoiv 





STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 49 

Sweet. 
Singular. Plural. 

N. r)dvg rjdsla rjdv N. rjd-ssg, slg rjdslai rjdsa 

G. rjdsog rjdslag rjdsog G. rjdioav rjdstwv rjdsav 

D. r)d-s'i, si rjdsla. rjd-s'i, si D. rjdsoi rjdsiaig rjdsoi 

A. r)dvv rjdslav rjdv A. r)d-sag, slg rjdslag rjdsa 

V. r)dv rjdsla rjdv V. rjd-ssg, slg rjdslai rjdsa 

Dual. 
N. A. V. rjdss rjdsla r)dss 
G. D. rjdioiv rjdsiaiv rjdsoiv 

xsxvqpag. 
Singular. Plural. 



N. 


TSTvep-ojg, via, 6g 


N. 


xsxvcp-oxsg, vlat, ota 


G. 


xsxvcp-oxog, vlag, oxog 


G. 


XSXVOp-OXOiV, VICOV, OTOJV 


D. 


xsxvcp-oxi, via, 0X1 


D. 


xsxvcp-ooi, vlaig, oat, 


A. 


xsxvcp-6xa, vlav, 6g 


A. 


xsxvcp-oxag, vlag, 6xa 


V. 


xsxvcp-ojg, via, 6g 


V. 


xsxvcp-oxsg, vlat, oxa 




D 


nal. 






N. A. V. XSXVCp- 


oxs, via, oxs 




G. D. XSXVCp- 


OXO IV, 


vlaiv, oxolv 



Remark. The student should be exercised 
in giving the roots of adjectives and participles, 
and explaining the laws of the changes, as far 
as they are obvious. As in nds, the form of the 
feminine throughout; as, navraa ndaa, ndviarfs 
ndrnp, ndvTGcus itdaais, the Dat. PI. Mas. ndvx- 
<jl Ttdat. In tv71tcov TvuTOvxaa. TV7trov(ja, tv- 

mOVTGl TV7tT0VCiL, TV7ZTOVT6CUS TV71TOVGCUS. 

§ 34. SOME IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 

1. Meyas, great, and noXvs, much, derive all 
their cases except the Masculine and Neuter 
of the Nom., Ace, and Voc, Sing., from the ob- 
solete TtoXXos and {leydXos. 



50 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Slug, noXvg nolh] noXv N. psyag (ityuXi) fiiya 

G. noXX-ov -i]g -ov G. [xeyuX-ov -t]q -ov 

D. noXX-co -jj -o) D. f.ieydX-0) -y -ip 

A. ttoXvv noXXijv noXv A. (.liyav [itydXrjv (xsycc 

V. noXv noXXtj noXv V. fisya [xsydXr} fisya 

Dual noXX-o) -a -w Dual (.leydX-on -a -w 

-olv -ouv -oXv -olv -aiv -olv 

PL noXX-ol -at -w, &c. PL [j.sydX-01 -at -a,&c. 

2. Numerals. 

N. slg (one) plot IV So ovdelg, ovdsfxta, ovdsv, no one. 
G. krog fxidg srog {.ii]deig, (.n^defiia, (Arjdev. 

D. kvl pia evl 

A. k'va (ilav ev 

TQslg (three), rgla, G. tqloov, D. tqioi, A. TQslg, tqlcc. 
iiaoaQsg (four), riaaaga, G. Tsooagwv, D. TtaoaooL, A. tsoocc- 
gag, Tiaoaga. 

§ 35. EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVES. 

1. Adjectives of the First and Third 
Declensions. 

Bga%ua jigyjLs qSovqs xaxijs. JBga^vs 6 
fitos, ij de ts%v7] paxgd. Sevocpav h'%£i [islavas 
i7t7iovs, xal [xiXava, bitXa, xal ndaav ti\v iodijja 
[xiXaivav. "Auav to aco^d ioTt {.dXav. c H f,id- 
X,a s%£i dcffiqv %agu(j(jav. To dea^ia tcqv f.ield- 
vcdv onXcov i)v %aguv. Uatimv tcov dgejcov i)y&- 
[lav idziv r( evosfieia. * H ykcpvgd Ictiv svgua 
xal 6 TtOTdfios flaOvs. At Ivxolai gov fiageiou 
ovx eiOlv. *Ey(o ixav etfii ayyeXos Gov. l H fxiv 
xogi} Tsgeivd ftfre, id 8s avdij rigsva. 

2. Promiscuous Exercises on Adjectives. 

Trjg 7Zoud£ias at f.iiv gi'Cat ntxgai etcfiv, ot 8i 

xagjiol yXvxus. Els ion Oedg xal ovx h'tiiiv 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 51 

aXXos nXtfv avxov. Kaxov xigSos, fiagv xsiprf- 
Xiov. OvSsls dStxos sctzac [ioi cplXos. c O dtxcuos 
[aovos Itfrt fiaxdgios. c O Uagvacfdos [niya, zal 
dvdxiov ogos iajiv. Koivd itixi rd x-n^tara tSv 
cpiXcov. c O [xiv Ssgidixos noXvs idrcv, ol Si igyd- 
rcu oXiyoi. Ovvtos fiiv ovdsls Idxiv svSaipav 
dvtfg. 'Papn fxexd [iiv (pgovrfosas &q>ihip,dss 
dvev 8i xavxvs fikafisgd. Ol Xoyoi aov dXndus 
sitii Ttal fisfiouot ycal ogdoL To piXi (isv yhvxv, 
yXvxaia Si i\ docpia. 

3. English into Greek. 
Thy icords are true and just. Thy name 
(ovo^ia) is holy. The house is beautiful. This 
is a beautiful house. Mortal life is not always 
happy. Virtue is a strong weapon. Virtue is 
useful (xgrftojtos) and lasting. A little time. 
Much time. Among (iv) many men there are 
many minds. Olympus was a lofty {vxpnXos) 
mountain. The waters are full of fishes. In the 
mountains are many and great animals. The 
body is mortal, but the soul immortal (to aco(xa 
[xiv, i} ipv%rj Si). 

§ 36. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. Adjectives are regularly compared by 
adding to the root isgos and xarog ; as, 

svgv (N. svgvg) svgv-Tsgog, xaxog. 

fioatag (y,dxag) fiaydg-jsgog, icczog. 

fislocv (fAEXag) [izkdv-xEgog, xaxog. 

yXeivo (xXsivog) xXsivo-xsgog, xaxog. 

oocfo (aocpog) oocpw-xsgog, xaxog. 



52 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Like aocpog all adjectives in o with a short 
penult. 

2. Sometimes ct, introduced to strengthen 
the form (see also § 47, 5.), makes ctisgog and 
drarog, which, increased by f, becomes iaiegog 
and itiraxog. These latter forms again, by a 
change frequent in the Greek language, become 
taregog and iaxaTog. Thus, 

aXr\&E (aXrj&ijg) aX^&i-oxsgog, axaxog. 

obicpgov (oiocpQOJv) owipoov-Eoxsoog, soxaxog. 
aonay (agnas) agnay-loxsgog, ioxaxog. 

3. The above terminations are affixed some- 
times with the omission of o, sometimes of other 
letters. The following are given as specimens. 

cpiXo {epilog) cpiX-xsgog, xaxog, and cpiXal-xsgog, xaxog. 

ysgaio {ysgaiog) ysgal-xsgog, xaxog. 

naXaio (naXaiog) naXal-xsgog, xaxog. 

anXoo (anXoog) anXo-soxsgog, iaxaxog. 

XaXo (XdXog) XaX-loxsgog, laraxog. 

nevTjx (nevrjg) nsv-saxsgog, soxaxog. 

4. Some adjectives in vs, and some in gog 
(dropping the g), make their comparisons in 
lvdv and idxog ; as, ijdvg, r\8lcov, ijdujTog • aiti%gog, 
ald%LG)v, ai'G/ictTog. In a few comparatives, the 
i, with the preceding consonant, is changed 
into aa or tt ; as, iXayvg, iXdactcov, eXdytajog • 
zayvg (day), Odocfcov, zd%ic>Tog. 

% 37. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 

1. 

xaXog xaXXiwv xaXXioxog 

xaxog xaxioiv xaxioxog 

XEtgwv xelgioxog 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



53 



[isyag 
TtoXvg 




TtXelwv 


[xeyiGTog 
nXuGTog 


ccya&og 




a(xuv(xiv 
fisXrliav 


(XQLOTOg 

fiiXnoTog 






xqsIttcov 
Xomv 


XQUTlOTOg 

Xwaxog 


From 


prepositions. 




71 Q 6 




TlQOTfQOg 


TTQOJTOg 


VTISQ 




VTTegrsQog 


VTZSQTCtTOg 


Adver 


bs are 


compared. 




avoi 




aV(OTEQ(0 


avaraxbn 


adim 




XttT(OT£Q(0 


%CtT(tiT(XT(ti 


I'|w 




O-WTSQG) 


elwTKTW 


law 




iotaxiQO) 


iacjTclxco 


Irreg. paXa 


[ioiXXov 


[IttXlOTCt 



§ 38. EXERCISES ON COMPARISON. 

Ovdiv XTJjpa aigsTarsgdv iatt zrjs agsTrjs. 
Ovdiv taxi ylvxiov Trjs nargtSos. Jstvoxdi^ rcov 
Q-qgLCdv idrlv -q dpaQia. c O ddvazos xoivos xai 
(both) iocs xugioTois xal tois fiaXjiGTOis* e O 
xgox6dec?,os l| IXa^idTov ytyvsTCU (becomes) [ts- 
yidTos * to fiiv ydg coov ov [iu'£ov iaxc yi]vziov^ 
avzos 3i yiyverou Inxd xai §S7cd7tt[%vs. Ugsofiv- 
xaxov t&v ovtcov, Oeos * dyivvtjTOS ydg • xdXXi- 
azov xo6[jlos ' noiriiia ydg dsov. Tis idzi [ist- 
£cov iv jjj fiadiXeia t&v ovgavcov ; Uocpla tcXov- 
tov xzrjfia zifAiazegov. c H (pQoyrjdis xai i\ vyi- 
eia fisyidza rots dvdgaitois dyadd. ' H xlsivo- 
zdzy\ rtofos iv ' EXXddt -qv 3 ^4drjvai. JUcdxgdzrfs 
docpwzazog qv zSv cpiXodoycov xai dcocpgovidza- 
zos. 3 H JZixskta Ttaaav rcov vvfiav xgaztdzrj 



54 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

lax iv. zfo^a eotlv dadevjjs ayxvga, tzXovtos hi 
dodsvsGiega. 

Remarks. 1. After comparatives, the Gen- 
itive is used ; as, dixouoTSQos ifiov, more just 
than I; otherwise the particle r\, than, is em- 
ployed ; as, tovto [ioi pakkov dgstixst 7} cot, this 
pleases me more than thee. 

2. After superlatives, interrogatives, &,c, the 
Genitive Plural is used. 

I 39. THE VERB. 

Such is the fullness and perfection of the 
Greek verb, so varied, and yet so philosophical 
and simple its structure, that the study of it 
furnishes one of the most delightful, profitable, 
and important exercises to the Greek student. 
We shall, therefore, treat it at considerable 
length. 

1. The Greek Transitive Verb has three 
voices, Active, Passive, and Middle. The Mid- 
dle has but four tenses peculiar to itself, and 
as these follow in their formation the analogy 
of the Passive, or rather are, in form, strictly 
passive tenses, we shall, in inflexion, make but 
two voices, active and passive. 

2„ The Greek verb has six moods, the in- 
dicative, subjunctive, optative, imperative, infin- 
itive, and participle. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 55 

3. Strictly speaking, the subjunctive and opta- 
tive form but one mood. They both state the ac- 
tion of the verb conditionally, the subjunctive be- 
ing the conditional mood for the primary tenses 
to which it is allied in formation, the optative, 
for the secondary or past tenses ; as, xvnxa tW 
tctslvcj, I strike that I may slay; sivipa iva. 
xT£ii>cu[M, I struck that I might slay. They 
might, perhaps, not improperly be named con- 
ditional present and conditional past, or primary 
conditional and secondary conditional. The 
name optative arises from a single and seconda- 
ry, though not unfrequent, use of the mood, 
which in its original and ordinary use is purely 
subjunctive. The other moods need no partic- 
ular remark. 

§ 40. THE TENSES. 

1. The tenses represent the action of the 
verb in two respects; 1. its time; 2. its state. 
The confounding of these distinct elements has 
occasioned much confusion in grammar. 

2. Time has three divisions, past, present, 
and future. No others are possible. But in 
each of these divisions of time an action may 
be regarded with reference to its state, as con- 
tinuing or completed, or simply as taking place 
without reference either to continuance or com- 
pletion. A complete scheme of the tenses, 
then, would make nine ; thus, 



56 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Present Time. 
I am striking. Going on or imperfect 
I have struck. Completed or perfect, 
I strike. Simply taking place or absolute. 

Past Time. 
I was striking. Imperfect. 
I had struck. Perfect. 
I struck. Absolute. 

Future Time. 
I shall be striking. Imperfect. 
I shall have struck. Perfect. 
I shall strike. Absolute. 

3. The name of a tense, then, should express 
both its time and its state. Thus Itvtixov, I ivas 
striking, is imperfect, but so also is tv7Ttg>, I am 
striking. The one is an imperfect in present 
time, or an imperfect present, the other in past 
time, or an imperfect past. So xizvcpa, I have 
struck, is a perfect present* hsivcpsiv, I had 
struck, a perfect past. We have then an im- 
perfect present, past, and future, (I am striking, 
I ivas striking, I shall be striking) ; a perfect 
present, past, and future, (/ have struck, I had 

* That this is the true character and designation of this tense, an inspec- 
tion of the above table, and a careful examination of its nature, will, we think, 
clearly show. / have struck evidently sustains the same relation to / am 
striking, that / had struck sustains to i" was striking. But the two latter 
are clearly an imperfect and perfect past ; the two former, then, are an im- 
perfect and perfect present. That is, / am striking (rv-rru) represents an 
action now going on; I frave struck (riru$oi), an action now completed. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 57 

struck, I .shall have struck) ; and an absolute or 
indefinite (aorist) present, past, and future, (I 
strike, I struck, I shall strike.) 

4. Of these nine tenses, the Greek verb has 
in the active voice distinct forms for six, in the 
passive, for seven ; thus, 

Present. 
xvitTco, I am striking. Imperfect, 
Thvcpa, I have struck. Perfect. 

Past. 
hvnjov, I was striking. Imperfect. 
hsjvcpBLv, I had struck. Perfect. 
hvipa, I struck. Absolute or Jlorist. 

Future. 
Tv\pco,Ishall strike or be striking. Absolute usually. 
Pass. TSTvyjopou, I shall have been struck. Perfect. 

5. The past tenses are more completely devel- 
oped than either the present or future, for the ob- 
vious reason, that all history and narration being 
of events in past time, more minute specifica- 
tion is here demanded, and therefore a separate 
form exists for the absolute or aorist. The past 
tenses are hence often called historical tenses. 

It matters not whether, in point of fact, it is only at this moment com-, 
pleted, or whether the writer only chooses to represent it so. In accord- 
ance with this view is the fact, that both in Greek and Latin the syntactical 
construction of the perfect is the same with that of the so called present. 
This tense has ever been a stumblingblock to the grammarians, and they 
have generally contented themselves with describing it as a past tense, but. 
connected either in itself or in its consequences with the present time. 

5 



58 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

6. It is seen, that, in the present and future 
divisions of time, the Greek verb has not sep- 
arate forms for the imperfect and the absolute. 
For these it employs the same tenses, while in 
the present the imperfect meaning preponder- 
ates, in the future, the absolute meaning. Their 
ordinary significations, then, are as follows. 

Present Time. 
ivtctcd, I am striking. Imperfect. 
TVTtTco, I strike. Absolute. 

TSTvcpa, I have struck. Perfect. 

Past Time. 
hv7tTov, I was striking. Imperfect. 
hvya, I struck. Absolute or Jiorist. 

hsTvysiv, I had struck. Perfect. 

Future Time. 
Tvxpco, I shall be striking (rare). Imperfect. 
rvyjco, I shall strike (its usual meaning). Absolute. 
Pass. TSTvipo[xcu, I shall have been struck. Perfect. 

7. We shall, then, in designating the tenses, 
as there is but one future act, call it the future, 
and the absolute past, designated by its ordi- 
nary name of aorist. The other tenses we shall 
designate as the imperfect present (tvtctco) and 
the perfect present (rirf^a), the imperfect past 
(hvnzov) and the perfect past (heivyeLv). 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 59 

§ 41. THE TENSES CONTINUED. 

1. The Greek verb has, it is seen, in the 
active voice six tenses. For four of these, 
namely, the future and aorist, perfect present, 
and perfect past, it has two forms, an earlier 
and shorter, and a later and fuller form. The 
earliest forms of the tenses may be supposed 
to have been the following, tvttco, I strike, 
sTvnov, I struck, jhvna, I have struck, heiv- 
nuv, I had struck, xvitka, I will strike. In the 
progress of the language, zvTtco is lengthened 
into tvutco, and tvitm becomes obsolete. From 
TV7tra is formed hvizrov, with a fuller signifi- 
cation, i" was striking, while stvtcov remains 
with its common meaning, / struck. Tvipa 
takes the place of xvtzsco, and in connexion with 
Tvxpo is formed hvxpa, as a more common form 
of the aorist ; while, by aspiration, Thv7ta be- 
comes Tsivcpa, and of course hexvuecv becomes 

§T6TVCpSlV. 

2. Thus the scheme becomes : 

Present Tenses. 
TUTtxa. Imperfect. 

TETVTta. Earlier Perfect. 
Tsxvcpa. Later Perfect. 

Past Tenses. 
Itvtztov. Imperfect. 
Ixvnov. Earlier Aorist. 

zzvxpa. Later Aorist. 



60 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



hsxvTtsLv. Earlier Perfect. 
hsTvcpuv. Later Perfect. 

Future Tenses. 
TVTtsa. Earlier Future. 

zvxpa. Later Future. 

3. The passive and middle voices have in 
the future and aorist the same variety of forms, 
and, in all the voices, the tenses may be ranked 
in pairs, 
tion; thus: 



according to their connexion in forma- 



Active. 



Passive. 



Middle. 



Imp. Pres. 
Imp. Past 


ETVTttOV 


TVTttOfXai 

iiVTiToprjV 




Ear. Fut. 


rime (a 


Tvnrjoofuxi 


Tvneofiai 


Ear. Aor. 


iivnov 


frvnrjv 


ervno^v 


Lat. Fut. 
Lat. Aor. 


TVlf/b) 

iivipa 


TV(pdr,O0[iCU 


TVlpOfAai 
ETVlpd^V 


Ear. Perf. Pres. 
Ear. Perf. Past 


rsxvTia 
(tetvtkiv 


TETV(JL^aL 
iTETl'llfiljV 




Lat. Perf. Pres. 
Lat. Perf. Past 


xtivcpa 
ixnvqjsiv 






Perf. Fut. 




ISIVWOUUI 





4. In most verbs, the earlier forms were 
never in use, or have become obsolete. In 
some, however, they have retained their places, 
and in a few, side by side with the later forms. 
Generally, however, and particularly in the fu- 
ture and aorist, where one is found the other is 
wanting, and sometimes euphony, and often, per- 
haps, accident, may have determined between 
them. The earlier future is found only in liquid 
verbs, in which it is almost exclusively used. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 61 

§ 42. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
AUGMENT. 

1. Each tense may, in general, be divided 
into three parts ; the prefix, the root, and the 
termination. We shall consider them in their 
order. 

2. The prefix is of two kinds, and employed 
for distinct purposes. In all the past tenses 
the Greeks prefixed to the root s, to indicate 
past time ; and in all the perfect tenses they 
prefixed the initial consonant with s, to indicate 
perfect action. 

Past Tenses, 1-xvtitov, i-xs-xvystv, s-xvyja. 
Perf. Tenses. xs-xvcpa, i-xs-xv(p£iv, xe-xvyjofiai. 

3. The prefix of the past tenses (s) is called 
the augment ; that of the perfect tenses is 
called the reduplication. One of these tenses 
(ixsxvcpEiv, I had struck,) is a perfect past, i. e. 
a perfect tense in past time ; it therefore takes 
both the augment and the reduplication. The 
prefixes then stand thus. Root xvn, Past e-xv7t, 
Perf. xe-xvti, Perf. Past s-xs-xv7t. 

4. It is thus clear, why the so called pluper- 
fect receives both prefixes. It is a perfect past. 
From the above principles, it also follows, that 
the augment of the past tenses is found only in the 
indicative, while the reduplication of the perfect 
tenses continues through all the moods. For the 

5* 



62 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

past tenses express past time only in the in- 
dicative, while the perfect tenses express per- 
fect action through all the moods. 

5. When the verb begins with a consonant, 
the augment suffers no change, and is called 
syllabic. In verbs beginning with a vowel, it 
coalesces with the vowel in the following man- 
ner ; sa into ij, as idxovov rjxovov • so into «, 
as iofitXsov cofiiXsov * ss into ?^, sskni'Cov jjkm- 
tov, and sometimes into si, as ss%ov si%ov. So 
the diphthongs av and sv into tjv, as savkovv 
iqvXovv, izv%6[i7]v y\vy6prv, and ai, 01, into y, a, 
as saixovv rfxovv, soixovv wxouv. This is call- 
ed the temporal augment. Many verbs, how- 
ever, neglect it, and verbs in ov, si, -q, co, ~i, D, 
with a few exceptions, never take it. 

6. Verbs beginning with a vowel admit, of 
course, no reduplication. The prefix of the 
perfect tenses, therefore, coincides here, in 
form, with that of the past tenses ; as, ahscd, 
jItovv, jjzqxa. It still, however, retains its dis- 
tinctive character, and is continued through all 
the moods. 

7. Some verbs beginning with a vowel pre- 
fix to the perfect tenses the two first letters of 
the root ; as, dysigco, ijysgxa, ay-7/ysgxa. This 
is called the Attic reduplication. It often short- 
ens the third syllable from the beginning; as, 
ijxova, dxrjxoa, Perf. Past i\xqx6siv. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 63 

8. Some verbs take s before the lengthened 
vowel of the past and perfect tenses ; as, 
ogda, idgav, icogdxa. 

9. Verbs compounded with a preposition 
generally take the prefix after the preposition ; 
as ixfidkka, i^sfiaXlov (^ 9. 2), lx/3i/3A^xa. 
KaOsvda (svda rare) makes ixddevdov and xa- 
drfvdov, * Avogftoa makes r\v(ogQovv • ivo^Xico^ 

% 43. THE ROOT. 

1. Many verbs have, in the imperfects pres- 
ent and past, a strengthened form, to which 
the terminations are attached, while in all the 
other tenses they are appended to the simpler 
form called the root. In forming, then, the va- 
rious tenses, the root must always be ascer- 
tained, and the tenses formed by combining 
this with the termination. Thus, root rvjt, 
Imp. Pres. Tvmcd, Imp. Past hvuxov (strength- 
ened by t) ; in the other tenses tvtc-oco (Tvipa), 
s-TV7t-oa (hvxpa), ri-TVTt-fxou (t£tv ftpou),, s-tvtc- 
&qv (iTvcpQqv), (^ 4). 

2. Verbs in nx are from roots in a labial 
mute, 7i, /3, or cp ; as, xgvTtTco, tvutco, gdmco, 
from xgvSco. tvtcco, gdcpco. 

3. Verbs in aa have generally a root in a 
palatal, x, y, or %, the palatal being dropped 
before aa ; as, idaaco, cpglaaco, fifcaa), from toc- 



64 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

yco, (pgixa, fi?txG). A few come from a lingual 
root. 

4. Verbs in ? have the root in 8 ; as, (pgd£a, 
(pgdda (Fut. (pgdd-aco, cpgdaco). Some have it in 
y\ as, xgd£co, ycgdyco (Fut. xgd^co). 

5. The student having learned the termina- 
tions (§ 45) should be accustomed to trace, 
according to the principles in § 4, the forms of 
the tenses as modified by the different roots; 
thus : 

Roots. Fut. Aor. Perf. Pres. Perf. Past. 

ray- (ray-crui) ra.\ui ira^et (riruy-a) rira^a riray-fiai 

<xu6- (ortid-tru) tfiiffu tTiiffa (wiirttO-a) ffivrtiKcc (vrliruO-iAat) <xizn<rft,vu 

6. The pure root can be precisely ascertain- 
ed from the earlier aorist, as here the vowel of 
the termination makes no change in the final 
letter of the root ; thus, Tay-, Aor. s-jay-ov. 
From the later future or aorist Toc|a, ha£a, it 
might indeed be ascertained, that the root was 
a palatal, but not which, as Ta|a, might spring 
equally from xdy-aco, rdx-aa, and zd^-ctco. So 
with the Perfect active and passive, later Aor. 
Pass., &c. 

7. The earlier aorist is generally the shortest 
possible form. Hence verbs in XX and (iv re- 
ject a consonant; as, ftdXXa, Imp. Past i'/3aAAoi/, 
Aor. sfiaXov. Diphthongs in the root reject, 
in this tense, one of their vowels ; as, Xuttcd, 
IXunov, Xeinoco, XsXsKpa, Aor. iXinov, Long 
vowels are shortened ; as, fajdco, eXadov. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 65 

§ 44. ANOMALOUS VERBS. 

1. To many pure roots ax is attached, the 
radical vowel lengthened, and the initial con- 
sonant repeated with i ; as, yvo-, yvoax, yvcoax, 
yiyvcoaxa ■ [iva~, [iifivrfaxa • rgo-, Tirgaaxco, Some 
do not change the vowel ; as, Sga-, didgdaxa. 
Some, beginning with a vowel, of course have 
no reduplication, and change e or o into i; as, 
£vgs-, evglaxco • aAo-, dXiaxo. 

2. Another class of verbs attach av to the 
root, and insert a nasal before the last conso- 
nant ; as, pad-, [xavddvco • tv%-, Tvy%dva • Aa/3-, 
Xa[ifidvco • Oiy-, dvyyava • kad-, kavOdva (^ 4. 
4). 

3. All these lengthened forms are found only 
in the Imp. Pres. and Past tenses ; as, yvo- 9 
ycyvaaxo, iyiyvaaxov, Fut. yva-aopou, e-yvaxa, 
&c. 

4. There are many anomalous verbs in Greek, 
i. e. verbs whose tenses are derived from dif- 
ferent roots. These different roots, the stu- 
dent should be accustomed to trace out. Thus, 
jrao^cj, Ear. Aor. snadov (root 7ta0-), Pres. at- 
taches a% and drops 0, 7zd0a%cd, 7tda%a, Fut. 7ra- 
aopac, from tcsvQ-, nsvOao^ai, nsiaotiai (^4. 7), 
Perf. s changed into o, ttinovda • svgiaxa (see 
above, 1), Ear. Aor. evgov (root svg-), Fut. 
svgrjaa, Perf. svgrjxa (root evge-, § 43). 



66 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



^ 45. TERMINATIONS. 

Passive. Middle. 

ofxai 

fxai 

7^ do fiat sofxac 

7\V 0[H1\V 

dijv dapyv 

(fOfAOU 

2. Example ; root ygacp-^ augment s with past 
tenses, red. ys with perfect tenses. Let the 
student make the requisite changes in the fol- 
lowing. We give the tenses in the same order 
as above. 

Passive. 



1. 


Active. 


Imp. Pres. 


a 


Imp. Past 


ov 


Perf. Pres. 


a 


Perf. Past 


SLV 


Ear. Fut. 


eco 


Ear. A or. 


ov 


Lat. Fut. 


do 


Lat. Aor. 


da 


Perf. Fut. 





Active. 

YQdCp-b} 

E-yqacp-ov 

yi-yqacp-a 

E-ys-yqucp-Eiv 

yqacp-to) 

{i'-yqacp-ov) * 

yqucp-oco 

i-yqacp-aa 



yQCi<f>-OlU(U 

E-yqacp-o^v 
yi-yqncp-^iai 
i-yE-yQ(iq)-fi7]V 
yqaq)-rjoo[.icu 

E-yQUCp-ljV 

ygw(f>-&rnJotLai 

E-yQMCp-dljV 

yE-yguq)-(JO(X(xi 



Middle. 



yQoup-fo l uai 
(s-yQ(x(p-6}ir}v) * 
yqd(p-oo(.au 
E-yqa<p-ua/.(Tjv 



3. Let the student thus form the tenses of 
TVTtTco, rdddco, referring to the next section for 
rules concerning the perfect active. 



* Wanting, because like the Imperfect Past active and passive. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 67 

§ 46. PECULIARITIES IN DIFFERENT 
CLASSES OF VERBS. -MUTE VERBS. 

1. The later perfect active is formed by as- 
pirating the labial and palatal roots, and in Un- 
guals it inserts x, dropping the lingual, x is 
here to be regarded as a strong aspiration. 

2. The perfect sometimes changes s into o 
in the active, and in the passive sv into v ; as, 

TQE7TCQ, TSTQO(pa ' T£V%G), TBTVy [JIOU. 

3. The perfect passive frequently changes s 
of the root into a ; as, rgeuco, Thgafzpai. So 
the earlier aorist active, tqstzco, hgajiov. 

4. Example of mute verbs ; Xs'ntco, root Xent^ 
short km-. 

Active. Passive. Middle. 

Imp. Pres. Xsln-co Xsln-ofxav 

Imp. Past 8-XsL7l-0V £-Xsi7l-6fl7]V 

Ear. Perf. Pres. Xs-Xom-a * Xs-Xei^i-fxuL 

Ear. Perf. Past i-Xs-Xoln-siv s-Xe-Xei^-^v 

Lat. Perf. Pres. Xs-Xucp-u 

Lat. Perf. Past i-Xs-Xelcp-siv 

Ear. Fut. Xm-doi Xm-rjoofiai Xnt-so^ai 

Ear. Aor. z-Xm-ov i-Xin-r]V i-Xi7i-6y,r]V 

Lat. Fut. XsLi}>(a(n-G(xi) Xsiq)-&^oofiai XzLyofxailji-Gonai) 

Lat. Aor. s-Xsiyja i-Xd(p-&7]y s-Xsupa^irjv 

Perf. Fut. Xs-Xelipopou (n-ao^iai) 

Examples for practice. 7t£i6co, ngdcfaco, ado, 
fidmcD, hiyco. 

* The earlier perfect inclines strongly to o in the root, and therefore often 
changes s into e. 



68 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

§ 47. PURE VERBS.* 

1. Pure verbs uniformly want the earlier fu- 
ture and aorist, unless they borrow them from 
some obsolete, impure root ; as, atgico, Ear. 
Aor. ukov, from ska. 

2. In the perfect, they insert % before a and 
siv, and have no earlier perfect ; as, nscpihi-xa, 

i7t£(pik7J-7C£lV. 

3. In all the tenses except the imperfect 
present and past, the final vowel of the root is 
lengthened, a and £ into ??, and o into a ; as, 
((piki) (pckTJ-oco, icpihj-aa, 7t£(pikr}~xa, 7t£cpikri- 
fxai, icpLkrf-Oyv, (pikrj-tfopou, &c. 

Exc. A few in a«, as idea, iadco • in kaco, 
as y£kda ' in £co, as xakico xakiaa, T£ki(o T£kk- 
(jco, and others, for which consult the lexicons. 
jilgico, Aor. Pass, ygidrjv • alvico alvida, f}v£cfa, 

4. Many lose a in their later future ; as, ts- 

ki<J(0 T£k£CO T£kS, T£k£60[iai T£k0V{iai ' OflOOOflOU 

5. Many in the passive tenses, particularly 
when the vowel remains short, insert a to 
strengthen the form ; as, T£T£k£6jA,ai, ij£kiad^v, 

for T£T£k£(AOU, STSkidtfV. 

* Verbs whose root terminates in a vowel ; as, <Qt\ia, root (f>iXs. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



69 



Example. cpiXia)^ root cpiXe. 



Active. 
Imp. Pres. cpiU-w 

Imp. Past i-cpds-ov 

Lat. Perf. Pres. ns-cplXrj-xvt 
Lat. Perf. Past i-ns-ydtj-xsiv 
Lat. Fut. <pdrj-G(t) 

Lat. Aor. s-cpdrj-aa 

Perf. Fut. 



Passive. 
<ptXt-o[i(u 
i-q>ds-6{ir}V 
7iB-(f>dr\-^iav 
i-7iE-cpdrj-y.t]V 
q>dr]-&r)O0iA(Xi 
i-cpd^-&r\v 
Tis-cpdrj-oofioci 



Middle. 



q)drj-ao[A-at 
s-(fd7]-ad^ir}V 



Examples for practice. d^Xoa, Ttpda, ysldco, 

§ 48. LIQUID VERBS. 

1. These form all the tenses, except the im- 
perfects present and past, from the short root. 

2. The earlier perfect frequently changes s 
of the root into o, and lengthens other short 
vowels ; as, xtsv-, exxova • (pav-, nkcpriva * xiX- y 

TETlXa. 

3. The later perfect inserts x before a and 
sir ; as, ayah-, scxpaXxa • (pav-, nkcpayxa 

ft 4 - 4 )- 

4. In the perfect, active and passive, and; 
some other tenses of dissyllabic verbs, e of the 
root is changed into a ; oxs A-, saxalxa, eaxaX- 
[xou, saxaXov, iaxdhrfv, ioxdkdqv • ne ig-, neg-, 
ninagxa, nknag^ai^ lndgQT\v, snagov, iitdgrfv. 

5. These verbs want the later future in cfco ; 
and the aorist in a they make without a, length- 
ening a of the root into -q or d, and s into sc ;, 

6 



70 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



CTskkco, root are}.-, Ear. Fut. aieXia, Ear. Aor. 
eaxaXov, Lat. Aor. eazeiXa • (paivco, root gsai/-, 
Fut. (pavia, Ear. Aor. ecpavov, Lat. Aor. Eipqva. 

6. The verbs xgivco, xXivco, xtelvo, tslvco, 
tcXvvco make the following tenses. 



xixqXxa 


XSXQlflCCl 


ixQl'&7]V 


xsxXixa 


xsxXipai 


exXl&r^v 


txxaxa 


ixxa^ai 


ixxa&i]V 


tiiaxa 


TSTUftaL 


fru&riv 


nknXvxa 


nenXvfiai 


inlv&rjv. 



7. Example. OTsXla. 



Active. 



Passive. 



Middle. 



Imp. Pres. 


otsXXw 


OTiXX-ofuai 




Imp. Past 


b-gtsXXov 


e-GxsXX-6^r t v 




Ear. Perf. Pres. 


s-aroX-a 


e-GiaX-pai 




Ear. Perf. Past 


i-GToX-SlV 


s-OTaX-ji'tjv 




Lat. Perf. Pres. 


t-GraX-xa 






Lat. Perf. Past 


e-oxuX-xsiv 






Ear. Fut. 


OXSX-£(0 


GXaX-^GOjIKL 


GTsX-io^ai 


Ear. Aor. 


i-gxuX-ov 


S-GTaX-1]V 


i-oxaX-6(j,r t v 


Lat. Aor. 


E-ozeiX-a 


e-GiaX-&rjv 


i-GT£lX-(Xfiip 


Lat. Fut. 




OTaX-&iJGO[icti 




Perf. Fut. 




i-oidX-ooficcL 





Examples for practice. 
A«, cpdetga. 



(paivco, anEtgco, yjdk- 



§ 49. INFLEXION OF TENSES. 

1. Each tense may be divided into three 
parts, viz. tense root, mood- vowel, and termi- 
nation ; as in txvipas, iivxp is the tense root or 
that part which is not changed by inflexion in 
the various modes, a indicates the mood, and 
o the number and person. tvtzto{iev, tvut tense 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 71 

root, o Ind. mood-voivel, fiev the first person plu- 
ral termination. 

2. The forms of the tenses, in the first per- 
son singular of the indicative, being known 
from the preceding rules, the student has only 
to vary the vowel for the mood, and the per- 
sonal terminations, in order to inflect the verb 
throughout. 





§ 50. MOOD VOWELS. 




Sing. Dual. Plur. 


Pers. 


12 3 12 3 12 3 


Ind. 


OSS OSS S 


Subj. 


co t\ t\ co tj tj co 7i 03. Vowels of the 



Ind. lengthened. 
Opt. oi. Imp. s. Inf. s. Part. o. 

§ 51. TERMINATIONS. 

1. The tenses maybe divided into two class- 
es ; leading or primary tenses, consisting of the 
present and future tenses {xvuxco, Tszvcpa, tv- 
ipco), and the secondary tenses, consisting of 
the past (stvtitov, szvxpa, hsrvcpsiv). These 
different classes of tenses have different termi- 
nations. They are, in general, as follows. 

2. Primary Tenses. 

Active Voice. Passive Voice. 

Sing, [it at, 6 ti, c>i iiai aai tcu 

Dual lisv tov tov lisOov odov aOov 

Plur. \isv ts vjt,vai Lisda ads vtou 



72 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Secondary Tenses. 
Active Voice. Passive Voice. 

Sing, v a — [jiTjv do to 

Dual [i£V TOV TK\V {.udov cOoV Od^V 

Plur. (lev re dav. v fieOa ode vto 

3. The subjunctive has, both in the active 
and passive, the terminations of the primary 
tenses of the indicative, and the optative those 
of the secondary tenses. 

4. Imperative. 

Active. Passive. 

Sing. Oi to do dda 

Dual tov tcov adov adcov 

Plur. ts Tcoaav dde ddcodav 

5. Infinitive vat. Part. vt. 

§ 52. MOOD-VOWELS AND TERMINA- 
TIONS COMBINED. 

1. Indicative Mood. 

In the active voice the terminations fit and dc 
(1 and 3 Pers. Sing, primary tenses) fall away, 
and the mood-vowel of the singular is length- 
ened from o s e into co £i u. 

Primary Tenses. 

Active. Passive. 

S. CO- £L-S £L- O-fXat £-dOU £-TOLl 

D. 0-fl£V £~TOV £-TOV 0-f.udoV £-dd0V £-ddoV 

P. 0-fX£V £-T£ O-Vdl(oVdl) O-(J,£0a £-d$£ O-VTOLl 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 73 

Secondary Tenses. 

Active. Passive. 

S. o-v e-s e- o-pqv s-ao £-to 

D. o-psv 6-tov £-xr\v o-fisdov s-cdov s-aQqv 

P. o-fiev s-ts o-v o-tisQa e-a6s o-vto. 

2. Subjunctive Mood. 
In the 2 and 3 Pers. Sing., the mood-vowel 
sl of the indicative goes into y. 

Active. Passive. 

S. o- zj-s J}- a-pai 7i~aai r\-Tai 

D. o-fxs v r\-Tov y\-iov co-^isdov tj-oOov r\-oQov 

P. (0'iisvri-TB o-vdi(oai) co-pada Tj-aOe co-vtou. 

3. Optative Mood. 
In the Active retains git for termination in 
the 1 Pers. Sing. ; in the 3 Pers. Plur. takes ev 
instead of v. 

Active. Passive. 

S. oi-[xl oi-s oi- oi-^qv oL-ao oi-to 

D. oi-{i£v oi-Tov oi-ti\v ot-fAedov oi-dOov oi-cd-qv 

P. oL-ixsv ol-ts oc-ev oi-[xsda oi-ode ol-vto. 

4. Imperative Mood. 

The active 2 Pers. Sing, drops Oi. 

Active. Passive. 

S. s- s-tco s-ao e-ddco 

D. e-jov b-tov s-adov s-adav 

P. s-ts s-Tcoaav s-ads s-oOcodav (or £c>Qcov). 

5. Infinitive. Active s-vai(s-v), ec-v. Passive 

£-<j6cU. 

6. Participle. Active o-vx (W, \ 26. 2). Pas- 
sive 0-[JL£VOS. 

6* 



74 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

7. The above is a general view of the regu- 
lar forms. There are, however, some excep- 
tions in both voices, and the active is less reg- 
ularly developed than the passive. We pro- 
ceed to give an example of the above with the 
exceptions. 

§ 53. ACTIVE CONJUGATION. Ulna. 

1. Indicative. 
Primary Tenses. 

Imp. Pr. lunw } Sing, a sig el 
Ear. Fut. Xitieco > Dual o/iev exov exov 
Lat. Fut. Xelipa) ) Plur. o/xev exe ovoi. 

Exc. Perf. Pres. mood-vowel a, 3 Sing. s. 
Terminations reg. 

Ear. Perf. tiloma f ® n * " " g * 

L, r> c 1 '1 \ Dual c/uev axov axov 

at. Pert. asXelwu Ui / - \ 

T 1 rlur. afiev are avoi^aoi) 

Secondary Tenses. 

t t» * ^ T Siriff. ov sg e 

Imp. Past eXeittov ) t\ \ 

-r, r . „. < Dual OW£V CTOr STVV 

.bar. Aor. tAin-ov J t>i ' 

{. rlur. O^EV «T£ ov 

Exc. 1. Perf. Past mood- vowel si. Termi- 
nation 3 PI. aav. 

Ear. Perf. Past eXeXoItielv I ^ k' 

t . n c r» i. .I 1 r \ Dual e/wfj' arov f/rwv 

Lat. Perf. Past eXsXeklhv ) p , r ' _ 

^ ^ rlur. gi^ucv elte Eioav or trjav. 

Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a, 3 Sing. s. 
Termination 1 Sing, wanting. 

{Sing, a ag s 

Dual ay.EV axov dxrjv 
Plur. a^.Ev axE <xv. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



75 



2. Subjunctive. 

Imp. Pr. Xunoa 1 

Ear. Perf. Islolnm Sing, a jjg y 

Lat. Perf. XsXdqxa J>Dual <a{i£v tjxov yxov 

Ear. Aor. Xmw J Plur. copEy rjxe oovoi (woi). 

Lat. Aor. Xstya J 

3. Optative. 



Sing, oifii oig oi 
Dual oi[aev oixov olxrjv 
Plur. oipev oixs oitv. 



Imp. Pr. Xslnoifii 
Ear. Perf. XeXolnoi^i 
Lat. Perf. XeXelcpoifii 
Ear. Fut. Xitisoljai 
Ear. Aor. XUol^iv 
Lat. Fut. Xslipoifii 

Exc. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a*. 

C Sing. «i|Ui at? «t 
Lat. Aor. Xaipai^L < Dual ca^sy atxov a/i?^ 
( Plur. ui(i£v aixs aisv. 

4. Imperative. 



£TO) 
£TOV £T(WJ> 



Imp. Pr. Xslns 1 Q - 

Ear. Perf. Pr. mom? I ^^ 

■p " a " .J ^ i Plur. £T6 £TW(j«>'(andoVTw>'). 
Exc. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a, 2 Sing. ov. 

{Sing, ov ccto} 
Dual axov axctiv 
Plur. cjt£ axcaaav. 

5. Infinitive. 

Imp. Pr. Xelneiv 
Ear. Fut. Xmssiv 
Ear. Aor. Acts^ 
Lat. Fut. XslipEiv. 

Exc. 1. Perf. original termination, vai. Ear. 
Pert. XsXoLTtevcu, Lat. Perf. keksKpivcu. 



16 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a, termina- 
tion i. ksiipcu. 

6. Participles. 

Imp. Pr. Xunovx~) 
Ear. Fut. Xmkovt I 
Ear. Aor. Xmovx j 
Lat. Fut. Xslipovx j 

Exc. 1. Perf. mood-vowel o, termination r. 

Earlier form XsXomox ) / \ ' 

Later form Xdeicpox j ^ 0Tg ' wg ta ° s ' 

Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a. Xeixpavx 
XsiyavTs Xsixpas, cctfa, av, 

§ 54. PASSIVE CONJUGATION. 

1. The four middle tenses have regular pas- 
sive forms, and are therefore included in the 
passive conjugation. 

2. Both the passive aorists belong to an old 
form of conjugation without mood-vowels. They 
will be explained hereafter. 

3. The perfects present and past attach the 
terminations to the root without mood-vowels. 

§ 55. 1. Indicative. 



Primary Tenses 

Imp. Pr. Xelnoficu ' 

Ear. Fut. Pass. Xinijoofxai 
Lat. Fut. Pass. Xsicp&^aofA 



Sing, ofxai zoai(mi,r}) Bxat 



n c ^ . i i f r Dual oue&ov eo&ov eo&ov 

Peri, r ut. XzXuwouui t». a . „ 

, , r r Plur. ous&a eo&s 

i in S-nnn I. I * 



Ear. Fut. Mid. Xintofiui 
Lat. Fut. Mid. Xeiipopai 



OVTOCl. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 77 

Exc. Perf. Pr. no mood-vowel. 

Sing. XsXun-^iai (XsXEinfiai) XsXein-ocu (XsXsupai) 

XekEin-Tcci 
Dual XtXun-iiz&ov (XsXslpiie&ov) XiXun-o&ov (XiXsiy&ov^ 4. 11) 

XsXsm-o&ov (XeXsicp&ov) 
Plur. XeXun-^s&a {XsXsl^fis&a) XiXsm-a&s (XiXsicp&s) 

XtXunvTUL.* 

Secondary Tenses. 

T „ . ., ( Sing, ouriv wo (so, ov) sto 

Imp. Past • ^W DQa °] f &ov lGd0V ia ^ v 

Ear. Aor. M. shno^v \ piur /^ ^ g 

Exc. 1. Perf. Past no mood-vowel. 

Sing. sXsXsl7i-(xr\v iXsXsin-ao IXeXuti-to 

fi-firjv \po 

Dual iXeXsin-fis&ov eXsXslti-o&ov iXeXsl7i-o&i}V 

p-fis&ov q>-&ov q>-&r)V 

Plur. iXsXsl^s&a eXeXsKp&s (iXsXsinvTo) XsXsifipsvoi yoav. 

Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. M. mood-vowel a. 

CSmg.djj.rjv aoo(ao,(o) ctxo 

Lat. Aor. M. iXsifd^v < Dual d^s&ov no&ov da&rjv 

( Plur. ape&a ao&s avro. 

2. Subjunctive. 

Imp. Pr. Xu7t(ti[i(XL ) Sing, w/ica yocu (rial, y) r^xai 

Ear. Aor. M. Xlnbi^ai > Dual (a^is&ov rjo&ov rja&ov 



m ) Sing. 
x } Dual 
ttt ^ Plur. 



Lat. Aor. M. Xslipw^iciL ) Plur. (a^is&a rja&s lavjcu. 

Exc. Perf. Pr. XsXsif.tfisvog to ?J? jj 

Dual XsXsi^isvia co^isv r\xov r\xov 
Plur. XeXsifiphoi, w{xsv t)ts (qvoi (doi). 

* An impossible form ; hence XsXuirarcu or \ikuQctrut (§11. 8), and 
more commonly XiXufipiw iWu 



78 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



3. Optative. 



Sing. oi t utjV otao (oto) ono 
Dual ol t us^ov oio&ov olo&rjv 
Plur. olfis&a oia&s oivio. 



Imp. Pr. Xstnoif.irjv 

Ear. Fut. P. hmjooifirjv 
Lat. Fut. P. XsLCp&rjoolfxrjv 
Perf. Fut. XsXuipol}ii]v 
Ear. Fut. M. XltteoI^v 
Ear. Aor. M. Xinolfirjv 
Lat. Fut. M. XEiyjolfiijv J 

Exc. 1. Perf. Pr. XeXeififxivog si'rjv si'r]g si'r} 

Dual XsXsififiiva sl'rjfisv tVrjTOV HrjTrjv 
Plur. XeXei^jxevoi sl'rjfisv sI'tjts si'rjoav. 

Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. M. mood-vowel at. 

Lat. Aor. M. Xuxp-ai^iriv mo ano 

Dual alps&ov aia&ov cda&rjV 

Plur. txlfis&a aia&e mvzo. 

4. Imperative. 

Imp. Pr. Xelnsao, so, ov I ^ fV ov . ^n^ 

Lar. Aor. M. kmzao, so, ov D1 «_ r a 



Exc. 1. Perf. Pr. XiXsin-oo(yjo) 

Dual XsXsup&ov 
Plur. XiXeicp&s 



XeXeItt-o&(o (AeAf/qp-vhu) 

XsXsicp&wv 

XeXsicp&cooav. 



Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. M. mood-vowel a. 

Lat. Aor. M. Xuxp-uu do&w, Dual aa&ov do&iov, Plur. «a^s 

«ff^C0ff«V. 



5. Infinitive. 6. Participle. 



Imp. Pr. 
Ear. Fut P. 
Lat. Fut. P. 
Perf. Fut. 
Ear Fut. M. 
Ear. Aor. M. 
Lat. Fut. M. 



XiiTiEO&ai 
XtmqoEO&ai 
Xeicp&rjoEo&ai 
XeIe'upeo&ul 

XiTlEEU&ai 
XiTCiadui 
XfllpEO&CU. 



Xeitto/xevoq 

XinrjooiuEvog 

Xsicp&^oo^Evog 

XEXfiipojiEvog 

XinEoy.EVog 

Xino^Evog 

XEtlfJOfAEVOg. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 79 



Exc. 


Exc. 


Lat. Aor. M. Xdipao&ui 
Perf. Pr. XsXeln-odai 


Xsupixfisvog 
XeXsLfi^isvog 



% 56. PERFECTS PRESENT AND PAST. 
FURTHER EXAMPLES. 

1. Pure verbs attach the terminations easily 
to the root, and make the 3 PL without the 
participle. cptXko^ nttpihruiai. 



Sing. 7i8q>lXt][iai 
Dual 7iecpiXrjiiE&ov 
Plur. TiscpiXrJiiE&a 


TiECflXriaai nEyiXir\Tai 

7IE(plXr)O&0V 7IECplXl]G&OV 
TIECplXrjG&S 7lECf>lX7]VTCU. 


Perf. Past snE(piXrj-(i'r)v 


GO TO 


Dual E7lE(plXri-[lE&OV 

Plur. eTiEcpiXrj-fis&a 


adov o&r]v 

G&8 VTO. 


Liquid verbs, acpdkkco, lacpaXtiai. 


Sing. i'ocpaX-fiai 
Dual iaq)(xX-fiE&ov 
Plur. EGcpdX-nE&a 


oat TOIL 

o&ov(&ov) o&ov(&ov) 

g&e(<&e) (vtcci) iocpaXfiivoi, slalv. 


Perf. Past iaqxxX-^v 


GO TO, &C. 



Lingual mutes, nsido, ninetd-pou (neTteia- 
(xat). 

Sing. 7iE7iEL-x>(xm{G(jittL) xhj«t((jca) ■d-Tou(oTou) 

Dual 7lE7lsl-&[AE&0v(0[XE&0v) &G&Ov(o&Ov) ■&G&Ov(o&Ov) 
Plur. 7lE7l8l-&llE&a(G[ZExya) -d-G&s(a-ds) (&VT(U) 71ETIEIG{IEV0L 

[elgIv. 

Examples for practice, kilsyficu, dedrfhapou, 

7ti(paV-[A.(U, TETQlfi{iai, 7JWT-(iai. 



80 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



§ 57. SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 





Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperf. Pres. 


XeItTOJ 


Xilna 


Imperf. Past 


tXunov 




Ear. Perf. Pres. 


XiXoma 


XeXoItko 


Ear. Perf. Past 


sXsXoItteiv 




Lat. Perf. Pres. 


XeXtiya 


XeXelqxo 


Lat. Perf. Past. 


iXsXdysiv 




Ear. Future 


Xineo) 




Ear. Aorist 


sXltiov 


Xinto 


Lat. Future 


Xdipoj 




Lat. Aorist 


tXzixpa. 


Xslyct) 

Passive 


Imperf. Pres. 


Xdnofiai 


Xun(a^.tti 


Imperf. Past 


sXeinoj^rjv 




Perf. Pres. 


XiXsi(.ijnaL 


XsXEifxfiivog (o 


Perf. Past 


iXsXsl^jurjv 




Ear. Future 


XiTtrjoofiai 




Ear. Aorist 


iXlnt]v 


Xina 


Lat. Future 


X£icp&t]oofiai, 




Lat. Aorist 


eXel(p&r)v 


Xstcp&w 


Perf. Future 


XeXslyofiou 


Middle 


Ear. Future 


XlTieOfACU 




Ear. Aorist 


eXinofxiiv 


XimafAaL 


Lat. Future 


Xiiyoncti 




Lat. Aorist 


eXsuptx f.it]V 


Xeiifjwfxai 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



81 



THE MOODS AND 


TENSES. 




Voice. 








Optative. 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Participle. 


XsItioi^il 


Xsins 


XUTIUV 


Xsinav 


XsXoinoifii 


XsXoltts 


XsXoinivai 


XsXoLTKag 


Xel£lcpoi[u 


XsXeicps 


XsXsicpe'vai 


XsXsiqxag 


Xl7TEOl[U 

XlnoifiL 

XuipOlfXL 

Xelycufii 


Xlns 
Xetipov 


XiTihuv 
Xtnslv 
Xelipeiv 
Xslifjcti 


Xms'cav 

Xl7t(OV 

Xelipwv 
Xslipag. 


Voice. 








XsitioI^v 


Xslnov 


XsiTiso&cti 


Xsmofisvog 


XeXeipfisvog nrjv 


XeXsiipo 


XeXsly&cu 


XsXufifiivog 


Xiny\ooliin\v 

Xmelrjv 

XsKp&rjaolfirjV 

XsKf&slfjV 

XeXsiyolfiyv 


XLnr\$i 
Xslcp&rjTt 


XiTirjoso&ai 

Xmrjvai 

X£iq>&rjO£G&aL 

Xsicp&rjvoiL 

XtXuysa&ai 


Xmrjuo^svog 

Xmug 

XsKp&yoofisvog 

Xsup&slg 

XeXsupofisvog. 


Voice. 








XL7lSOLfir)V 
Xl7lOl[Xr)V 

XsupoifirjV 
Xeiip<xl[iT)v 


Xmov 
Xelipcu 


Xmisa&ai 

Xl7ZS(J&(Xl 

Xslipsad-ai 
Xsitpaa&ai 


XmsSfisvog 
Xmofxsvog 
Xstipofisvog 
Xsiipafxsvog 



82 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



PARADIGM 



Active 





Indicative. 




Subjunctive 




Imp. Pres. 


"kl'ttf-U 


US 


u 


"kuv-u 


V 


V 


/ am leaving, or 


OfllV 


trov 


trov 


Uft.lV 


tirov 


tirov 


I leave. 


oft.iv 


trt 


overt 


UfllV 


fire 


utri 


Imp. Past. 


ikutf-ov 


ts 


t 






1 


J was leaving. 


o/xiv 

O/uCtV 


trov 

trt 


trtiv 






1 


Ear. Perf. Pres. 


XikoiT-a 


as 


i 


Xtkoi<r-oj 


V s 


V 


I have left. 


aft.IV 


K.TOV 


arov 


Uft.IV 


vrev 


tirov 




afi.it 


an 


aft 


Uft.IV 


tjrt 


Uffl 


So Lat. Perf. Pres. 


\iku<p-a 


as 


t, &c. 


kikuf-u 


V s 


? ,&C. 


Ear. Perf. Past 


tXtXoivr-uv 


us 


u 








J had left. 


uft.iv 


UTOV 


urnv 










tlfttV 


UTt 


utrav 


or tffav 






So Lat. Perf. Past 


ikiXu<p-uv 


us 


14, &C. 








Ear. Fut. 


Xivrt-u 


us 


u* 








I shall leave. 


Oft.IV 

eft.iv 


ITOV 
1<TI 


trov 

oven 








Ear. Aor. 


'UlV-OV 


IS 


t 


XtT-U 


V s 


* 


I left. 


Oft.IV 


trov 


trtiv 


UfllV 


tirov 


nrov 




Ofl.IV 


ITl 


ov 


UftlV 


tin 


ucn \ 


Lat. Fut. 


Xii-^-u 


us 


u 








i" shall leave. 


Oft.IV 
Oft.IV 


ITOV 

tri 


trov 
outri 








Lat. Aor. 


'iXu-^-a 


as 


■ 


Xu\p-u 


tis 


V 


I left. 


UfJt.IV 


arov 


arrtv 


UftlV 


tirov 


nrov 




Ct.ft.IV 


an 


av 


UftlV 


tin 


ucn J 



* Commonly contracted in the active and middle ; as \ivru, TUtriTf, X/- 
Tt?, XiTtTrov, &c. See § 59. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



83 



OF felna. 

Voice. 

Optative. 

\uvr-cif&i 01$ o 



OlfJLlV 



oirov otrnv 
oin ottv 



Imperative. 

trot 

in irutrav 



iru 

irtuv 



Infin. 

Xuvttv 



Participle. 
Xiivr-av evo-et ov 

ovros ouffijs ovros 



XiXoif-etftt ei$ oi 

otft.iv oirov o'trv\v 
otfi.lv otn out 

kt\U<p-Olf£l 01$ Otf&C. 



"KiXoit-i ira 
irov iruv 
in irwaav 

xixnip-i iTei/ } 8ce. 



XlXllQlVat 



XiXonr-us via o$ 
oros via$ oros 



XiXttQ-us via o$ 

oro$ vix$ ores 



Xi<7f(-oift,i 


01$ 01 






XfTtllV 


Xtiri-av ovfftx. ov 


Olfi.IV 


oirov otrnv 








ovros ovens ovros 


OlfJt.IV 


otri oitv 










Xivr-oif&i 


01$ 01 


Xtor-i 


ira 


Xmiiv 


Xm-uv ovffa ov 


otft.iv 


oirov otrv\v 


irov 


iroiv 




ovros ouo-tis ovros 


Olft.IV 


otn ottv 


in 


iruffav 






Xl'f^/-Olfi,l 


01$ 01 






Xityav 


Xirty-uv ovva ov 


Otfi.IV 


oirov otrnv 








ovros ovens ovros 


Otfi.IV 


otn onv 











Xit\f/-atfci eci$ at \Xi7^/-ov area 
atfi.iv atrov airtjv arov drow 

atft.lv atri anv | an droiffav 



Xit^ai 



XitTp-as uo-a av 
avro$ arris avro$ 



84 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



PARADIGM 



Passive 

Indicative. j Subjunctive. 

Imp. Pres. Iktivr-oftai y trat \kuv-ufzxt *j yrui 

I am (being) left i bpiDov ttrSov ladov apidov naSov tjafov 

(relinquor). bpida tah ovrai\ upiSa. yah uvratl 



Imp. Past 
I was (being) left 
(relinquebar). 



ikittf-of&nv cu tro I 
bpidov iffSov iaSw 
optDx lah evro. \ 



Perf. Pres. \kiku-fjt,f&cci ifa< ttui Ikikupftivos u> %s y 

I am or have been left', ppiOov <p6ov <p6ov \kikEifz/u.ivu ci>/u.iv yrov %rov 

(relictus sum). (ipiSa. <ph ftfzsvei ^ksku/ifAtvet ufiiv «t£ uai 

[>WI 



Perf. Past llkikii-ftftyv ipo <xro j 

I was or had been left, (*/ju6ov <p6sv <p6nv \ 

(relictus eram). (tpiOa. <ph *ikti-/u,fiivoi 

\r,ffa.v. 



Ear. Fut. 
/ shall be left. 



kiafm-oyat 
bfziSov 

OfAlSx 


*j zrat 

IffSoV MT0OV 

lafa ovrai 




lk'iar-v>v 

VtfllV 


VjTOV 7IT9IV 

nn viaxv 


knr-u 

UfJLlV 
UfJLlV 



Ear. Aor. 
I was left. 



Lat. Fut. 
I shall be left. 



la-ofzcc/ n srat 
oftttlov tadov ia6ov 
bfAiQa. lah ovrai, 



Lat. Aor. 
/ was left. 



\ikii<p0-iiv 


ns n \ku<p$-u 


V s 


»/*" 


nrov y)<rviv , ufjt.iv 


nrov 


ti/zsv 


wrt n<rav \ Zytv 


•ATI 



Perf. Fut. 
/ shall have been left. 



ktkii-ip-o/uKt y ira.1 I 
bpiOov ia&ov ladov 
by.iPcr. i ah ovrut\ 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



85 



OF Xslnca. 

Voice. 

Optative. 

Xei7r-oif*>iv oio 
oifxiSov 
oiftefa 



oiro 

fffav oio-Sviv 
oitrfa oivto 



Imperative. 

"kutf-ov io6u> 
utQov io-dcov 
iff fa iff 6 caff at 



Infinitive. 
\iitfur6ui 



Participle. 

Ximoftivos 



Xi\iififiivo$ ilnv ilns i'i>] 
XlXiifjcfjtivu ilripiv iinrov s/»jt»v 
XiXstftf&ivoi ilrif&tv ilnrz u'wrxv 


\i\ii--4>o Q^a 
tpfav <p6uv 
<pfa tyduffav 


'hikittySau Ik&kiiftftivos 








XiTyiff-oijunv oio oiro 

oijxifav otffdov oifffav 
oiftifat oifffa OIVTO 




?-iTVffifffaii IkiTTviffofitvos 



Xiwii-nv 


m 


■n 


npsv 


f]TOV 


tlTfl 


TlfAtV 


UTi 


yitrct 



\\i<zW'6i tu \\ivr%vut 



\ti(Q6viff-a'ift,nv oio oiro I 

eifcifav oitrfav o'lff&nv 

0l(Jt,l6ot, Olfffa OiVTO I 



Vkiityfa\ffiff6a.i XiKpSyiff'o/Aivos 



\u<pfat-nv fi; '/} 

npiv ?itov nTnv 

VifJI.IV VtTl WffCCV 



Xii<p0i)-Ti toj \\a<p6rivui \hu(pfai$ 

TOV TUV 
Tt TUffOLV 



XiXti-^-oif^fiv 



oif&ifav oifffav eifffajv 

OlfJltdoi Olfffa OIVTO 



XiXii^/iffdai \kskilt]/OfJt,$VO$ 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



PARADIGM 



Ear. 


Fut. 


Indicative. 

Xi-rt-of&cu y 

oftztiov tirdov 
of/,i6a laCi 


irai 

itr6ov 
ovrxi 


M 

Subjunctive. 


IDDLE 


Ear. 


Aor. 




to 

MT0OV 

ttrSt 


tfffav 

OVTO 




yrcti 
Wfftfov 
enroll 


Lat. 


Fut. 


Xti-Jz-opai 


V 

iffdov 

ttrh 


tfftSov 






Lat. 


Aor. 


ufttdov 


CO 

affdov 
a<rdi 


UVTO 




tir at 1 



SYNOPSIS OF THE 



Active. 





Indic. 


SUBJ. 


Opt at. 


Imper. 


Infin. 


Part. 


Imp. Pres. 


irriXXu 


erriXXtv 


arxXXoifii 


ffriXXi 


errixXuv 


ffr'iXXuv 


Imp. Past 


'itrriXXov 












Ear. Perf. Pr. 


'luroXtt. 


itrroXu 


iffroXoifii 


'hroXi 


IffroXivtci 


ierreXuf 


Ear. Perf. Past 


'urroXziv 












Lat. Perf. Pr. 


KTTOcXKOe, 


\<rru.XKu 


iffTCtXK.Olf/,1 


ttrraXxt 


itrraXxivai 


itrrxXxus 


Lat. Perf. Past 


iHTO.Xx.UV 












Ear. Fut. 


OTlXiU 




(rnXtoiftt 




trrtXitiv 


trriXsvv 


Ear. Aor. 


'((TTOCXOV 


trraXu 


ffrcLXoiju.1 


ara.Xi 


a-rttXiTv 


trraXav 


Lat. Aor. 


itrriiXot 


aruku 


ffruXaifAi 


ffriiXov 


ertiXai 


ffTilXas 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



87 



OF Xslnb). 



Voice. 

Optative. 

%.ttfs-oif&yiv oio 

oifjciSov oiffGov 
o'tfcJa etrh 



oiro 
oio-dnv 

OlVrO 



Imperative. 



I Infinitive. | Participle. 

YklTtilffSoU \XtTiOfJLiV0S 



XlTT-Oi/XiJV 

oifx,i6ov 

OI(Jl.i6ot 


010 

oitrdov 

oiah 


oiro | "knr-ov 
eiffUvtv itrSov 

OiVTO \ ifffa 


lo-6a> J \i<rio-6tt.i 

itrdojv 

iff duff av \ 


ki-rofttvos 


Xaip-oifAnv 

otf*.i$ov 
oifiiSa, 


010 

oiffdov 

oitrfa 


oi<r6nv 
otvrt j 


\Xttyiffdui 


\Ulf/0fAiV0S 


aifit&ov 
aifAtSa 


ato 

etiffiov 

aitrh 


u'to-Qnt | atr&ov 
atvro j ao-fe 


ao-Qoiv 
affdutruv 


Xltyotffdui 


Xwj/ciftivos 



LIQUID VERB axiUa. 



Passive. 



Imp. Pr. I 
Imp. Past 
Perf.Pr. j 
Perf.Past 
Ear. Fut. 
Ear. Aor. 
Lat. Fut. 
Lat. Aor. 
Perf. Pr. j 



SUBJ. 
ffriXXtUfJCOit 

iffraXfA. 



Indic. 

ffriXXofz.ai 

iffrtXXofJLYIV 

effraXfzou 

ffra.Xriaofjt.ai 
itrraXriv 
ffTetX6riffofjt,at\ 
itrraXSinv \ffra\60Z 
iffra.XffOfjt.at j 



trraXcH 



Optat. 

ffriXXoifjt,nv 

: lffraXftlvo$ t'l- 

[ , ^ 

ffra.Xyiffoifi.riv 

ffrxXuyv 

ffraXhjffotfAnv 

ffruXhiviv 

IffruXffoifitiv 

Middle. 



Imper. j Infin. I Part. 
trrikXov ffriXXiffSai \ffriX\o[&ivos 

iirraXffo ttrraXSai itrraXftivos 

ffraXwfiff&ui ffrxXfiffo'fAtves 
ffrdkyj^i ffraXmai ffraXzig 

ffraXSfiffitr&ai ffraXdnffOfiivos 
sru.X.6nri ffraXdwui \eruXhls 

IffroiXffiffdcii {iffrocXirofAives 



Ear. Fut. I trrtXiofiat j IffrtXtoipnv 

Ear. Aor.' iffru.Xofjt.inv ffraXojpat ffrot.Xolfjt.tiv 
Lat. Aor. iff ruX a/aw ffniXuf&ai trruXai/xw 



ffraXou 
ffritkui 



ffriXiiffScti 
ffrocXiffdat 
ffruXotffSou 



ffriktofictvos 
ffrot.Xofjt.ivoi 
ffriiXdfAtvos 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



Indic. 


SUBJ. 


Optat. 


Imper. 


Infin. 


Part. 


rxinroftxi 


rciffff&fieu 


TXffffOlfAilV 


rdfftrov 


rxffffivtlxi 


TXffffO/XSVOf 


irctffcrofjt.nv 












rirxyfjt.xi 


nrayftivos u> 




TtTx\o 


rirx%0eu 


TiTXyfjClVOg 


irtTxyft'/lv 




[w 








•rxyto/uxi 




ruyzoifjt.yiv 




raytiff0cci 


TxyibfAivos 


IraybfAnv 


rxyaifcxt 


rxyoif&nv 


rxyov 


rxyir^xi 


rxyo/ztvos 


rx\»f/.xi 




Tet%ttftn» 




rx£nr6xt 


<rx%bfiivt>s 


IrafcdfMV 


rx^cafixt 


rce%aiftw 


reckon 


Tx\xff6xi 


rx^x/xives 



§ 58. THE MIDDLE VOICE. 

The middle voice reflects the action back 
immediately or remotely on the agent ; as, tv- 
nxofiai, I strike myself, (pvkdnof.iai, I guard my- 
self. Along with the tenses peculiar to the 
middle, the imperfects and perfects present and 
past of the passive are often used in this sense. 
The following, then, is a complete scheme of 
the middle. 



Imp. Pr. { . 
Imp. Past I 
Perf. Pr. U 
Perf. Past i 
Ear. Fut.l 
Ear. Aor. 
Lat. FutJ 
Lat. Aor. i 



§ 59. CONTRACTED TENSES. 

1. The Imperf. Pres. and Past of dissyllabic 
verbs in ao, eeo, and oco, are contracted in the 
active and passive voices, and the Ear. Fut. 
active and middle of mute and liquid verbs. 
The contractions are mainly subject to the rules 
laid down in § 8. They are as follows. 

2. In verbs in aco, a before an o sound (ao, 
aco, aov, and aoi) is contracted into co and (as 
in aoi) into co ; a before an e sound (as, ar\, asi, 

■ay) mt0 a an( l ( as m a£t an( l a #) a ' as > T H L( ^ C0 
TipS, Ti[.idoif.a Tifxwfu, xipas xifia, Tifxdjj Tipa, Tl- 
fidei Tif.ia. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 89 

3. Verbs in sco contract ss into si, and so into 
ov ; as, cpiXss cpiXsi, (piXiopsv cpiXovpsv • other- 
wise, they drop s ; as, cpiXsco cpiXS, cpiXsoi^ii 
cpiXol[ii, cpiXssiv cpiXsiv. 

4. Verbs in oco contract os and oo into ov ; 
as dyXosrs hjXovxs, dtjXooixsv dyXovfisv • o before 
o, oi, ov is lost ; as SrjXoco SjjXco, SyXooi SrjXot, 
SrjXoov SqXov • before r\ it goes into o, as fo?Ao- 
?^Tf drjXcoTS, but before # and si into o* ; as d-qXorf 
SrjXoi, fajXosi SrjXot* except the Inf. osiv, which 
makes ovv ; as, BijXosiv StjXovv. 






€>- ■&. fe 






ev* * * s |a » k 

g B a I I '14 

S £ 5 'I" 5 i-3- ^ s 5 §. g £ S J 

w £ £ „ * v£ ^ 03 » «< "^ ^ ^ Q 

[l* q . -2 fc ^ -^ Ph 5 te §■ §■ g S 

GA . a II* 

& £ PL, Ph Pe, <! JlJftfc^^ft 



J. J- 



8 S 



90 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Imperfect Present and Past of zipac*. 

Indic. Sobj. Optat. Imp. Infin. Part. 

ri/u.-aa/ u da £> doipi afn at a dav av <&av av, 

ir't/t-aov av, 

Tip-dopon ufjictt dufiui aftxi ctoifttiv upviv dou a darStti cLtrdcii aifttvoj apivof - 

ITifA-adftllV upw. 

Imperfect Present and Past of dnXoa. 

onX-ou a ou u eotfii oTfii at ov ouv avv ouv av. 

idr,/.-oov evv, 

itiX-oof&ect avfixt ou/tteti u/ucti oolftyv oiftviv iou ou oi<r6ou ovj&ai oofinog ov pivot. 
idfiX-oofitiv evpnv. 

\ 61. TENSES WITHOUT MOOD-VOW- 
ELS (or VERBS IN p). 

1. Some verbs with monosyllabic roots in a, 
s, o, and others which attach w or wv, form 
three tenses, viz. the imperfect present and 
past active and passive, and the earlier aorist 
active and middle, without mood-vowels ; as, 
from roots 6e do era, Oifxsv Soiasv (jtcL[isv, in- 
stead of Oiopsv doofisv (jidofiev, 

2. These tenses incline to the full original 
terminations; as, Pr. Ind. Act. Sing, pc, a, cn\ 
2 Sing. Imp. Oi ; 2 Sing. Ind. Pass, acci ; Inf. 
Act. vou. Their terminations are otherwise gen- 
erally like those of verbs with mood-vowels. 

3. In the imperfects present and past, active 
and passive, they prefix to the root the initial 
consonant with t, except that to roots begin- 
ning with tit, or, or a vowel, a rough i only is 
prefixed ; as, do dido, Os Tide, ara laxa, i ie. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 91 

The aorist prefixes the augment regularly to 
the root ; as 6s, lQr\v. 

% 62. ACTIVE VOICE. 

1. Indicative. 

Terminations. 
Imp. Pr. iii a at D. \jlzv xov tov P. fxsv ts vat. 
Past v a — fisv rov tt\v fisv re aav,v. 

The radical vowel is lengthened in the sin- 
gular; as 

rrf-npi W wiri D. tf&tv trev irov P. tptv srt iva-t (rrfuffi). 

\r\6' 1 / / \ 

"a I " v "' " t f Jtiv tT0V STtlv i P lv iTi iffciV \ 0T lv )' 

iff- 3 

2. Subjunctive. 

The Subjunctive has its regular mood-vowel, 
which it contracts with the radical vowel, o# 
going into a and cw\ into ?/, not into oi and a. 

<rt6~iu a ins *iS £*J % S. iufifv upt.iv iti-rov nrov tnrov n<rov P. iu/mv ufttv 

[inn nrt iuiri ufi, 

%ih'iu u ens Z$ on u D. oufJt.ivufjt.lv enrov urov onrov urov P. ouft.iv ufj.it 

\Jnr% UTl OUT l U<Tt. 

3. Optative. 

t is added to the radical vowel, as xtdst, and 
t\ inserted before the terminations of the sec- 
ondary tenses. 

vih'i-nv ns n D. *if*iv *)tov nrnv P. tiftiv nri n<rav (sv).*' 

htioi-nv *is n *ifttv nrev nrnv nft.iv nri u<retv (iv). 

* More commonly, D, nfatftiv, rrfiirov, rthirnv, P. rtdtTfAiv, rihirs,^ 
riSuiv. 



92 



INTRODUCTION TO THE 



4. Imperative. 
Terminations Oi to, xov tcov, te tgxjolv. 

rih-ri <ru D. rev <ruv P. r$ rutrav. 

o'o-dt ($os) ra> rov ruv <r« raffctv. 

5. Infinitive. 
Termination vcu; as ridivai, Sidovou, iivat, 

Aor. OeZvai, dovvai, stvau 

6. Participle. 
Termination vt; as, dtdo-vr (Sidovs ovou oV), 
tiOs-vt (tlOzls), Sovt (8ovs). 

% 63. FULL PARADIGM. 

1. Tidijui (6a% 

Active. 

Imperfect Present. 



Ind. t<V-*!^/ ns ntrt D. 
Sub. <rid-u ys »J 
Opt. <ri6-Uriv lins lit) 

Imp. <ri0-iri tru 

Inf. rittmt Part. mlifr. 

Ind. \rid-nv vis n D. 

Ind. «V-»j» »>- >? D. 
Sub. 4-£ vis jl 

Opt. ^e/->JV »J >7 

Imp. 0£-$ to; 
Inf. 6uvou Part &<s. 



Ind. rtd-ifAtxi tffai treti 
Sub. TtlJ-uy.tt.1 n vjrai 

Opt. <rifal-{A)]v o to 

Imp. r'td-iffo iciu 
Inf. Tt6ur6a.i Part, r^i^i 



E^EV ET0V £T0V P. E^EV ETS £?(?/ 

&»^<£v tjrov ijrov ufjt.iv tjri utri 

uvifjt.iv tivjrov uvirnv Ufifjctv tinn tivitrecv 

Ufztv urov urrjv u[/.iv un uiv 

ersv iruv trt 



Imperfect Past. 










£^4EV 


Aorist 


irriv 


P. 


SjU.IV 


£Tt 


tffUV. 


EjKEV 


trov 


irnv 


P. 


tfjCtV 


trt 


iffuv 


uifjt.lv 


tirov 


yrov 




Zfi.iv 


nn 


eotrt 


Hf&ev 


*}T0V 


97TJJV 




rifjt.iv 


tin 


vtrav 


70V 


TUV 






Tl 


rucav 



Passive. 

D. i(jki$ov kt&ov taOov P. ifjt.i6a. uxh ivrai 

u/jt.i6ov tjtrHov ricSov ufziia. ytrfa uvroct 

fiidov eOov aSrtv ftida c6i vto 

itr$ov i<r6uv ttrfa i<r6utra.v 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 93 

Imperfect Past. 
Ind. \ri6-ifivtv tao tre D. iftthv tffhv ia&w P. ifii6a. teh t\ro. 

Middle. 

Aorist. 

Ind. iHi-f&nv ffo <ro D. ftsdov ahv a$m P. (Jti6a ah vro 

Sub. 6-ufjta.i »J ijreti wftshv tjahv %ahv ufjciht, yah uvrctt 

Opt. hUpnv o to pz'Jov a&ov aSvtv fittfu ah vro 

Imp. h-aoiiov) a6u a&ov aOu* ah a&uaav 

Inf. ha6«,i Part. hp.tvo$. 

2. "Iox-qtii (ora). 
Active. 

Pr. Ind. 'lar-ripi m *iat D. aftzv urov arov P. afiiv an aai 
Sub. laru Opt. laretitjv Imp. 'laruh Inf. laruvxi Part. <V<ro? 
Imp. Past Yar-nv va v\ D. ufitv osTav arnv P. a^ev «ts ay or uaav 
Aor. eW»jy Sub. aru Opt. araitiv Imp. o-t^/ Inf. arnvui Part, arsis*. 

Passive. 

Pr. Ind. 'iarafAon Sub. iarZp.a.t Opt. taraifuiv Imp. 'Jarotao Inf. 'Iaraa6a,i 
Past lard-fitiv ao -to, &c. [Part, larujtivos* 

Aor. Mid. iardf&Tiv Sub. arwpeii Opt. araifAyv Imp. ardao Inf. arda^txi 

[Part, arciftivee,. 

Pr. Ind. 3iSayc< Sub. 3<2£ Opt. $<V«v Imp. )/Wj Inf. M«mi Part. S/SmY 
Imp. lo/o-ft»v a/j a D. a^Ev aray orjjy P. a^sy ars fla*ay 
Aor. Ind. i'£«y Sub. £» Opt. Sa/sjv Imp. So's Inf. oovvui Part. W.<. 

Passive and Middle. 

Pr. Ind. titofjMi Sub. h'oufiat Opt. ^a/^jjy Imp. $<Wa Inf. ViloaSut 
Past l^/5a^»y [Part. ^tooptvos-. 

Aor. M. I^o/i6>jy Sub. ouficti Opt. toipw Imp. SaVa Inf. $«W«i Part. Vo pivot*- 

4. Jeixvvfic (defective). 
Active. 

Imp. Pr. Ind. hixw-pi Imp. & Inf. von. Part. y«k 
Imp. Past louxvvv. 



94 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Passive. 

Pr. Ind. ^itxvv-fixi Imp. <ro Inf. aSon Part, psvo; 
Past ibiiKvvfinv- 

§ 64. REMARKS. 

1. Several verbs form only the earlier aorist 
in this way ; as, fiaivco, I go, root /3a, Aor. 
1/3 rp ' yiyvStixa, root yvo, Aor. syvcov • Svco, 
sbvv. In these, the long vowels i\, a, and v are 
retained in all the numbers ; as sfirjoav. 

2. So the two aorists passive are formed, 
ilirtijv and sXsicpdjjv (tense-roots skins and 
ilsicpds), and retain the long vowel in the dual 
and plural. See paradigm of IsiTiofjtai. 

3. The other tenses of these verbs are reg- 
ular, except that the later aorist of Tidy/ii, iy\\n^ 
8ida[H 9 has x ; thus, sOrjxa iOyxdfiqv, sdcoxa sdco- 
xdpyv, -qxa • and from 6s and I (riOrjfu and 
irjfjii) the Perf. Pr. is rsdsixa and slxa. Aorists 
in xa are used only in the indicative, and there 
only in the Sing, and 3 Plur. 

4. Synopsis of fy^u, to send, (root I). 

.Active. 



Imp. Pr. Ind. 
Imp. Past 
Ear. Aor. 


ofytt/ Sub. lai 

"nv and 'liov, 'lov 


Opt. him Imp. 

v, (compounds s<p*(j 
I'/fj* 


\i6t Inf. 
t/c, utp'tovv) 
'Is 


livut Part, hfc 

£/v«i u; 


Fut. 

Lat. Aor. 
Perf. Pr. 
Perf. Past 


%ko, 

UKO. UKU 
UKUV. 




ritroi/Ai 

UK 01 fit 






UKIVCU UKU 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



95 



Passive. 

Imp. Pr. 'hfjcui, Imp. Past Yifxrw, Perf. Pr. ufjt.cn Perf. Past t'lftw, Lat. 
Fut. tdrxrofAcct, Lat. Aor. 'i&nv, Perf. Fut. uffoftxt. 

Middle. 

Ind. Sub. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. 

Ear. Aor. 'i/u-yiv upxi ilpriv 'itro (ou) 'itrGxi i/usvos 

Fut. riffopai fooiftnv %ffiff$ui fitrofaves 

Lat. Aor. r\x.xf*.v\v. 

§ 65. 3 EIMI and r EIML 

Of other small verbs in pi, we shall give only 
sifu, to be, and si(M, to go, both irregular. 

dpi, to be, (root I.) 



Imp. Pr. 
Imp. Past 
Fut. 



Ind. I Sc 

e^k* eTj or sT l<TT< '^ %s 

iiTTov oZfitv nrov nrov 



tfffziv urrov 

Iff/XiV tffr'i 



nfjt.iv v\rov 
riftiv nn 
urofAXi etrn 'iffrxi 
iff-ofzihv ladov ut6ov ' 
ofAiQu iff fa ovrxi 



ticri(v) oZfj.lv jjVfc ojffi 
sj or«V 

ntrxv 



Oft. 



Imp. 

li-nv v\$ n \i*fa 'iff rot 
vifjt.iv v\rav rirm'iffrov 'iffrojv 
•nfjt.iv yri nffxv'iffri 'itxro/ffxv 



ftifov fffov tr6nv 
fjt,i0oc ffh v 



Inf. Pres. uvxi, Fut. 'itrurdxi. Part. Pres. av oZffx o'v, Fut. iffoftivog. 



Elfii, I am going, (root L) 



P. "iftiv "rz laffi 
Part, Iojv lovrx Vsv 



Imp. Pr. iTfci u; or u eJffi D. "ifjt.iv "tov '/rev 
Sub. "&>, ">js, &c. Opt. 'loifAi Imp. 'I6i, "trot Inf. livxt 
Imp. Past yuv %u;, &c. and r\'t'x n'ias. 

Mid. to hasten, Imp. Pr. Upon, Past Yifjwv. 



S 66. ANOMALOUS VERBS. 

1. What tenses are actually used in any 
Greek verb must be learned from observation 
and from the lexicons. Tenses of the middle 
form will be often found to supply the place of 



96 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

the active. The student should be required 
to ascertain carefully what tenses are in use, 
and what are not ; thus, from dxova, to hear, 
not dxovtia and rjxovxa, as given in the old 
lexicons, but dxovaofiai and dxrjxoa, while in 
the aorist jjxovoa is used. 

2. rtyvaaxco, to know, (root yvo, § 44. 1.) 
Active. Passive. 



yiyvcoaxb) 


yiyvojay.OfiUL 


eylyvuoxov 


tyiyrajoxofiyjv 


yvaaopcu 


yvb)o&rjOO t ucu 


syvtov 


iyvwo&riv 


I'yvwxa 


syv(oo(iai 


eyviaxtiv 


£yvwo{ir t v. 



3. Aa^dvo, to take, (root Xwj3, Acc/3, § 44. 2.) 

Active. Passive. Middle. 

Xa h uftar(o Xa{A(3dvo/u(u 

ilunfiavov iXaufiavojuiiv 

tlafiov (lr\<pfrriv iXa(36[AT}V 

tiltjcpa tikrjfificu 

u).rj(psiv uXi]fxjxriv. 

4. Examples for practice, ^vglaxa, I find, 
{.lavddvco, I learn, dvrjaxco, I die, £g%o(icu, I come, 
fidlXa, I throw, nda^co, I suffer, yiyvofiai, I be- 
come. 

Rem. Many verbs, as yiyvopou, ag/o^iai, have 
in the imperfects present and past no active 
forms. Others are altogether passive and mid- 
dle in form ; as, aladdvo^aL, 8i%0[iai. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 97 

| 67. ANALYSIS AND COMBINATION 
OF VERBAL FORMS. 

1. To the pupil who has gone thoroughly 
through the elements of the Greek verb, as 
hitherto developed, it will now be found a 
very useful exercise both to analyze and com- 
bine verbal forms. The student should be 
rendered perfectly familiar with all the separate 
parts of the verb, as the nature of the aug- 
ment and reduplication, their forms and to what 
tenses they are respectively applied, the mood- 
vowels, terminations, &c. Then give him, e. g. 
IXkyovxo to resolve into its elements ; s, the 
augment belonging to past tenses ; vto, the 
termination of the 3 Plur. of the secondary 
tenses, Pass. ; o, mood-vowel of the Ind. ; — 
thus Xsy is left for the root So XiyoivTo, Xsy 
root, 01 Opt. mood-vowel, vzo 3 Plur. term, sec- 
ondary tenses passive, and of the optative which 
takes these terminations. 

2. Given for analysis. sXsyov, Xet-cuvTo Xi- 

JtyTOV, 7tS7t£l(jTOU, S7l£LGd^OaV 7teL0d}]GOLVTO, TfTOC- 

gayuai, i7tgd%dr]v, Ttga^at^v, jd^avja^ fiXsnov- 
tcu, pXiyjcovTou, ifiXsipdaOyv, TtscpiXrjVTai, (piXij- 
oeis, Sca^adoi', iSedicoxTO, dsdiaxafiev, cpvyoljyjv^ 
(psvyiijai, 7t£<psvyaoi, TtagTiyo^v, (3dXys, /3a- 
Xoivxo, ifidXXszo, fidXXrjode, sldsvat, xsxirjodai, 

CDXS6TO. 



98 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

3. The student should also be in the habit 
of forming tenses in different numbers, per- 
sons, moods, and voices, by combining the sep- 
arate elements ; thus Xsyco, Imp. Past Ind. Pass. 
3 Sing. ; root \sy, aug. with Past iksy, mood- 
vowel o, term, vxo ; i-Xey-o-vxo. Lat. Aor. Mid. 
3 dual Xsy, tense root !Af|, mood-vowel a, ter- 
mination adijv, i-Xs^-d-adiiv. Opt. 3 PL keg-cu- 
vto. Practice will make this easy to the stu- 
dent in Greek, and will give him an unlimited 
command over the inflexions of the verb. 

§ 68. THE TENSES IN THE INDICA- 
TIVE. 

The import of the tenses has been already 
given in general in ^ 38, but a few additional 
remarks are needed to complete the view. 

1. The imperfect present means properly 
am doing, and, as an absolute, do. From am 
doing, comes naturally go to doing, am endeav- 
ouring to do, am accustomed to do ; it is thus 
employed to state universal propositions. 

2. The imperfect past has all these modifi- 
cations of meaning except the absolute, (for 
which there is a distinct tense, the aorist,) / 
was doing, I went to doing, I endeavoured to do, 
I used to do. This latter modification of mean- 
ing is frequent. 

3. The aorist, especially the later aorist, be- 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 99 

side its ordinary and proper meaning of did, is 
employed sometimes, like the present, to ex- 
press what customarily takes place ; as, oliyos 
%q6vos asl btiXvas xds ovvrfdecas tcov (pavXav, a 
short time always dissolves, &,c. 

4. The perfect present sometimes passes 
over into an imperfect present, with a new but 
natural signification ; as, xixTTtfiai, I have ac- 
quired, hence / possess, vkQvypta, I have died, 
hence, / am dead. In this case the perfect 
past becomes an imperfect past, and the per- 
fect future an imperfect future ; thus, ixsxTtf- 
fAijv, I possessed, xexT-qao^iai (I shall have ac- 
quired), I shall possess. 

5. The following scheme presents these va- 
rious uses of the tenses. 

C I am striking, (I endeavour to strike,) 
tv7Ttco, < / go to striking, I strike, I am ac- 
( customed to strike. 

{ I was striking, I went to striking, 
tov, ^ j us ^ ^ strike. 

hvipa, I struck, I am in the habit of striking* 
rvxpco, I shall strike. 
( zsTvqja, I have struck. 
\ xixTrtfiou, I have acquired, hence / possess. 
( irsTvcpscv, I had struck. 
( ixsxT7J[zr}v, I had acquired, I possessed. 

, ( / shall have acquired, hence / 

' r ' ( shall possess. 

* The aorist is also often used where other languages use a perfect past. 



100 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

$ 69, THE TENSES IN THE OTHER 
MOODS. 

1. The distinction of time, which in the in- 
dicative is indicated by the tenses, is in the 
subjunctive and optative expressed chiefly by 
the moods. The subjunctive follows in its for- 
mation the primary, i. e. the present and future 
tenses, and is the conditional mood of these 
tenses, and is rendered may ; the optative in 
like manner is the conditional mood of the past 
tenses, whose analogy it follows, and is ren- 
dered might. Thus the perfect present is in 
the subjunctive Tsrvepa, I may have struck, in 
the optative rsTvcpoifM, I might have struck, i. e. 
here it is a conditional perfect past. So the 
aorist indicative or absolute past (hvipa, I 
struck,) becomes in the subjunctive xvxpco, I 
may strike, in the optative Tv\pou[.u, I might 
strike. Even the future becomes in the opta- 
tive a future in reference to past time ; as, he 
said that I should shoiv, sXel-s ore S^kcoaotfti. 

2. In the other moods also, viz. the impera- 
tive, infinitive, and participle, the aorist loses its 
signification of past time, and differs from the 
imperfect present only in not indicating con- 
tinued action. Thus xvxpov, strike, bears the 
same relation to tvtits, be or go to striking, as 
hvxpa bears to hvuxov (/ struck, I went to 
striking). 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 101 

3. We present, then, the following scheme 
of the force of the tenses in the several moods. 

Indicative. 
Imperf. Pres. tutctcd, I am striking. 
Imperf. Past. hv7txov, I was striking. 



Future. 


Tvxpco, I shall strike. 


Aorist. 


hvxpa, I struck. 


Perf. Pres. 


TEjvcpa, I have struck. 


Perf. Past. 


hezvcpsiv, I had struck. 


Subjunctive (or Conditional of the Leading 




Tenses). 


Imperfect. 


TV7tro, I may be striking. 


Aorist. 


jvxpcj^ I may strike. 


Perfect. 


T£Tv<pa, I may have struck. 


Optative 


(or Conditional of Past Tenses). 


Imperfect. 


zvTtToifit, I might be striking. 


Aorist. 


Tvipaifxi, I might strike. 


Perfect. 


TSTvcpoi^L, I might have struck. 


Future. 


Tvyjoipi, I might strike (hereafter). 




Imperative. 


Imperfect. 


TVTtis , be stiiking, or go to striking. 


Aorist. 


rvyjov, strike. 


Perfect. 


jhvcps, have struck. 




Infinitive. 


Imperfect. 


TvitTSLv, to be striki?ig. 


Aorist. 


Tvyai, to strike. 


Perfect. 


Tsivcpivai, to have struck. 


Future. 


Tvipeiv, to be going to strike. 



102 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Participles. 
Imperfect. xvtzxcov, (being) striking. 
Aorist. xvxpas, striking (the mere act). 

Perfect. xsxvcpcos, having struck. 

Future. xvyjav, going to strike. 

4. Let the student give the tenses, with their 
meanings, of the following verbs in the several 
moods ; kafxfidva, I take, cpilico, I love, xsXevco, 
I direct, cpaivo, I show, cpsvyco, I flee, tq£%<o, I 
run, Xeltzco, I leave, pavOdvco, I learn. 

§ 70. EXERCISES ON THE TENSES 
IN THE INDICATIVE. 

1. Imperfect Present and Past. 
2Jo(pia fiovjj dddvaxos fiivsi. c O dvrjg Ovij- 
oxsi. l H yvvq sQvijoxs. *Ev a iyco ygdcpco dv 
oidsis. 2v (isv xavxd pot dcdas, iyco 8i ds%0[,iou. 
Ol 7toXe[iioi fxiv cpsvyovcytv, ijixsts 8i Siaxofisv. 
Udvxa xd dyadd SiScodiv 6 Osos. IleguTtaxov- 
[iev iv xco tsgcp xov Kgovov. Bga%sZa ijdovij 
noXXdxts [iaxgdv xixxst Xvtiijv. Tavza eksysv 
(used to say) b Ttaxrjg [xov. 2Jcoxgdxns xovg vs- 
ovg xcov ^Adijvaicov £8i8aox£. e 'Ocfxis (.n] xokd^st 
xd 7td6n, avxos vn avxcov xoXd^exac. Msyioxov 
xcov ovxcov, xonos • ndvxa ydg ^cogst' xd^iaxov, 
vovs ' Sid navxog ydg xg£%si * la/vgoxaxov, dvd- 
yxij ■ xgaxel ydg ndvxcov • oocpcoxaxov, %govos * 
dvsvgloxei ydg ndvxa. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 103 

2. Perfect Present and Past. 

Trjv ijtLcfxoXrjv col dnkoxaXxa. Aedcoxds [aol 
xov %Lxuva. C H kvTtrf 7t£7tXrjg(oxsv vpcov xy\v 
xagdiav. * AitoXzXoinaOLv yp.ds Btvias xal Ua- 
Olcov • dXX° ovxs dTtodsdgdxaaiv ovxs ditonscpsv- 
yaOLv. *Eixl x?]s xoXaxsias, as inl fivrj^iazos, 
avzo \jlovov xo ovo[ia xrjs (piXlas iitLysyganxaL, 
JEvql7Tl87]s iv Maxsdovia xsdauxaL. Maya xa- 
xov pot, dvfxj3sj3r)xsv. Ovdsls tkotzotb dsov sa- 
gaxsv. TsOvqxs 0iXi7tnos ; Ovx, dXX 3 dodsvsl. 
c O naxtfg xal 7) (tijxrjg avxov ndXaL ixsxsXsvxTj- 
xsoav. To nvg ndvxas bfiocas xaisi ' nifvxs 
ydg xolovxov. ^AnoXaXa vtzo xov divjovs. 

3. Future and Aorist. 
Tavxa nonjcfco. Tavxa inoLTida. MidQov xd- 
Xavxov sXafiov xal xovxd 001 dadco. Ot "EXXt\- 
ves ivixTjdav xovs Ilsgoas. Otjgsvs xt]v *Agid- 
Svtiv iv Nd^a xoxsXltis xal i^snXsvas. "Oxs xav- 
xd (the same things) avvs6aLvsv (kept happen- 
ing) avxS xjj vaxsgaia xal xr} xgixz?, ixdXsas 
xovs Ttaldas. "Oxe spsXXov ygdcpSLv nagsysvsxo 
xls. Ovdsls xov ddvaxov scpvysv. *Av7)g aocpos 
xds iv fiicp dv^Kpogds gaov oi'dSL xSv dXXcov. 
Ovx sklss (tcivo) xo At\Qt\s vSag ; "Oxl 7) yjv^jj 
0v7ixrf itixLv ovSinoxs 7tLdxsvoo UoXXd dvOgco- 
710LS Ttagd yvapiv snsds (fall out, happen). Q H 
xov Ivd%ov Ttals 7) xaXr) vito xi\s e 'Hgas els 8d- 
fjiaXLv [isxEfiXjjdr}. 



104 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

^ 71. EXERCISES ON THE TENSES IN 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 

ngoaig/opou i'va, firj Odvrjg. UgooijXOov tW 
firj Odvois. Asaoixa (xrj rjXidios ysvcopcu. 'Eds- 
doixsiv [AT} TjXidios ysvoipnv. AnsoxaXxd dot 
Tavx-nv xrjv S7tiaToXi)v iVa fxddyg jjjv sprjv cpiXtav. 
' AnsoTSiXd oo t s7itoioXrjv iW pddois ti]v cpiXiav 
[iov. 'ExsXsvos fiadtXsvs firf tlvol fidXXsiv nglv 
Kvgos i[LnXrjodsui fidXXcov. KsXsvst fiaciXsvs, 
[xjj Tiva fidXXsiv nglv av Kvgos ifxnX^odjj /3ccA- 
Xov. ' Anisvat ifiovXsro [iiq 6 nanjg xi d%0ono 
xal rj noXis [A8[i(poiTo. Anisvat fiovXsrcu fljj 6 
narjjg ti d%ftyrzai xal r/ noXis [iSfupnTac. 'Edv 
qpiXofiadrjs fa, noXv^adrjg say. Ei (piXopaOijs 
serfs, noXv[iaOijs av ysvoio. 

Remark, The particles si, ots, instdrf, ngiv, 
stand unchanged before the indicative and op- 
tative, but before the subjunctive they become 
Idv (rjv, civ), oxav, snsiddv, nglv av • as, si i'doi- 
(ii, if I might see ; sdv loco, if I may see ; si 
zavd' ovras s%si, if these things are so ; sdv 
xavd* ovtcos s%ri, if these things be so. 

§ 72. FURTHER REMARKS ON THE 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 

1. The original and proper distinction and 
use of these two moods has been given above 
and illustrated in the last section. They are 
both strictly conditional moods ; the optative of 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 105 

the past, the subjunctive of the present and fu- 
ture tenses. Their use, however, especially 
that of the optative, is much wider. 

2. The signification of the optative is less 
near to the actual than that of the subjunctive. 
It is used, therefore, in cases of pure hypothe- 
sis, where there is no prospect or thought of a 
decision. Thus the subjunctive lav tl s%g), Sco- 
tia, if I have any thing I will give it, implies a 
design in the speaker to ascertain whether he 
has any thing or not. It is a case in which he 
feels interested and wishes to arrive at a decis- 
ion, while si e%oi{ii tl, dotyv dv, if I should have 
any thing I would give it, is purely hypothetical. 
It states the connexion of a given conclusion 
with a given premise, without intimating wheth- 
er there is any possibility or expectation of the 
existence of the condition. The past tenses of 
the indicative are used where the speaker de- 
signs to express his conviction that the thing 
supposed does not and cannot exist. Thus, 

In d. si ti? {i acpsXsi, tt^v %dgiv dnsdldcov civ, 
if any one would aid me, I would repay the fa- 
vor, — but I do not expect he will. 

Subj. Idv tls (a cocpeXjj, %aQiv dnodcooa, if any 
one aids me, I will repay the favor, — -the lan- 
guage of one solicitous to obtain aid. 

Opt. sl tls [i oo(pshr}(jSis, %dgiv dizodidoinv civ, 
if any one should aid me, I should repay the 
9 



106 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

favor, — but I am entirely uncertain whether 
he will or not. 

El ivopiyov xovs Osovs dvOgancov xi cpgovxi- 
X,siv, ovx dv rjfjiikovv avxcov, if I thought the 
Gods had any regard for men, I would not neg- 
lect them, — but I do not believe they have. 

Edv vo^i'Cco Osovs dvOgajrcov xi cpgovxi&iv, 
ovx dfxehjao avxcov, if I may suppose the Gods 
to have any regard for men, I will not neglect 
them, — and I will endeavour to ascertain the 
fact. 

El vo[ii£oi{ii Osovs dvOgconcov xi (pgovxi^siv, 
ovx dv dpsXofyv avxcov, if I might suppose, let 
me but suppose the Gods to have any regard for 
men, and I would not neglect them, — but it is a 
point involved in entire uncertainty. Here is 
a delicate shade of meaning which the English 
language can hardly express. 

3. Omitting the protasis, — the clause with 
si, — the optative with dv is used in simple 
propositions, wherever in English we say might, 
ivould, can, &c. ; e. g. to a a pax o sides saxiv ov 
xls dv avjaixo, the corporeal is that which one 
can touch ; ifiscos dv fidOoipc xavxa nagd gov, 
I would gladly learn these things from thee. 
Hence from the tone of moderation peculiar to 
the Attics, it comes to be employed in making 
positive assertions ; ovx dv Xd[3ots nagd xov fiij 
s/ovios, you could not, cannot take from a man 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 107 

who does not possess; tovto ovx dv /svolto, 
this cannot be. 

4. Exercises. 

Fsvoito av nav iv tco [taxgco XQ° VC P' ^ 0l °^ x 
dv TCtdoL^iijv Sots (xt) tovto tcolslv. Ovx av 8v- 
vaio litJ xaficov svBai[iovsZv. ™ Ayis igoTvOsls 
ncos av tcs iXsvdsgos SiaLiivoi, QavaTOv TtaTa- 
(pgovSv, scp-q. 3 'Avsv cpiXcov ovdsls av sXolto £j}v, 
s%cov id louzd dyaOd itdvTa • xal ydg tols 
tcXovtovgi, xal dg%ds xal Svvaoxsias xsxtthis- 
vols, doxsc [idfatfTa cptkcov slvai %gsia • iv nsvia 
ds, xal Tats loutais hv<$Tv%iais, Liovqv otovTai 
xaTacpvyyjv slvai tovs cpiXovs. MoXis av tis ex 
Trjs [isyiGTffs iniiisXsias rocs ttJs cpvascos dpagTtas 
imxgaTrjosisv. Kal iiijv av as kafia tcots (if I 
ever catch you) • 'Av Xafirfs, a (3sXtiots • tils 8i 
ovx av Xdfiois. Aixaios av tovs tolovtovs Xs- 
yoiftsv ( u?/ povov sis savTOvs apagTavsiv dXkd 
xal Trjs tv%)\s slvai TtgoSoTas. 



§ 73. 

The subjunctive and optative are also used 
to express entreaty, desire, &c, but this in 
conformity with the principles stated above. 
The subjunctive chiefly in the 1 PL and the 
2 Sing, and PL to express direct exhortation, 
entreaty, command; as, i'copsv, let us go; firj 
Saviidays, do not wonder. While the optative 
is more commonly employed like our might, 



108 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

may, would, &c. (might it be, may it be,) for 
more general expressions of desire ; as, oXolo, 
may you perish. 

Exercises. 
Mqdsvi dvfxcpogdv ovsidtotjs • xocvi) ydg ij tv- 
%ij, - xal to [xiXXov dogaxov. Kdv fxovos ys, 
cpavXov fXTJrs k£§jjs [m\ts igydoy Liijdiv. Kahjv 
6oi deol didocsv Tvyijv. * SI nal yivoio nazgos 
evTvyeaxegog. Ttaitav ztavaol ifxd ddxgva tois 
dots piksOL. @ig* (come on), 6 tsxvov, vvv xal 
zo Trjs vi\(jov {what pertains to the island, the 
condition of the island) fiddys. Miq tovto 6 s 
ddixniia ifiov Oijs, sc xgaTrjaat avvifiij ^ikimtco 
Tiqv Lidyijv. Eif Ovijaxois oxav aoi to %gs6v eXOtf. 
EvxXudijs 6 Zaxgazixos, dxovoas tov ddeXcpov 
XkyovTOs ' dnoXoi^inv si firj os Tiaagi^aaiiurv, iyco 
di, ei7i£v, st (A,r\ (piXeiv r^ias 7t£Loaif:a. 

§ 74. EXERCISES ON THE IMPERA- 
TIVE, INFINITIVE, AND PARTICIPLE. 

1. Imperative. 
Toy uiv Osov (pofiov, tovs di yovus zcua ' 
tovs di cpiXovs aldyvvov, tois di vofiois nsiOov. 
Aoytaai ngo Igyov. Mi) xaxots olilXsi. Tds 
rjdovds Oijgsvs zds LUTa dofys • Ttgvjis ydg, avv 
tS xaXS [isv, dgiOTOv, dvsv di tovzov, xdxiOTOv. 
c Hyov tidXiOTa osavTco nginuv, xociiiov, aio%v- 
vijv, acofpgodvvvv. J ' yiys dr), cb KgiTcov, 71£lQ(oii£- 
Oa avTo), xal ivsyxaTco tls to (pdgiiaxov si TSTgi- 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 109 

nrai • s I Si fir), TQiyjdrco 6 avQgaitos. El tls 
hi tlvos ivdstadaL Soxsl, 7igog ifis Xsyiia, xal ft 

TLS SLTtSLV TL ftovlSTCLL, Xb^OLTCO. Mtf [AOL aVTlki- 

§#s. *AXkd zai/Ta ovtcos nzitgdyQa. El vlos 
si tov Oeov, aaaov asavjov, xal xaTafi-ndL and 
tov aravgov. El fiadLXsvs 'IogarfX Itfrt, %tma- 
fiyJTco vvv and tov OTavgov. BgaSeas [xiv cpiXos 
ylvov, ysvofisvos Si neiga 8l<x[.isvslv. Ail%ov tl iv 
tz} nrjga %%us* 

2. Infinitive. 
XaXsndv to 7toL£Lv, to Si xsksvctaL gaScov. To 
xaXas dnodavelv lSlov tols dyadols. Ovtol ov- 
tcos fjdv sctlv to xgtfpaia £%slv as dvLagov to 
dnofidXXsLv. Ov to %aig£Lv Igtlv sv ngaTTSLv, 
ovSi to dvidodai, xaxas. Xgrf (3gaSias fiiv cpl- 
Xov ylveodaL, ysvofisvov Si duxfjiivsLv. KeXeva 
as (pvkd^aL tijv yvvalxa, xal SiacpvXdTTSLv e'as 
dv wutos SsI-copaL. Mbl^ov (iiv xaxov cpaiisv to 
dSLxsZv, IXaTTov Si to dSLxeZadaL. "0 ilbXXsls 
ngdiTSLv [xij ngoksys ' dnoTv%av ydg ysXaad-qarf. 
Kddfiov cpaalv ix <Polvlxtjs vnd tov fiactLXsas 
dnoOTaXijvaL ngds &JTnoLv Evganvs. Eig!-7]s, 
as invdeTO tov 'EXXrjonovTov i£sv%dou, xal tov 
"Ada SiectxdcpOaL, ngorjyev ix Tav JJdgSsav. 

Remark. The neuter article is used in all 
its cases with an infinitive, converting it into a 
noun ; as, xaigds tov Xiysiv, the season of speak- 
ing ; Ix zov vopL&Lv, in consequence of thinking ; 
iv tw TtsLgdoOaL, in the endeavour. 
9* 



110 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

3. Participle. 

XaXsnov sotl Xkyuv ngos yadiiga, coxa ovx 
s/ovoav. 'Adtxst JZcoxgdwis, ovs i) no fag volu&l 
Osovs, ov vo^ii'Ccov. c HgaxXrjs ogyiodsis Alvov 
drtixTSivs. e O 2Jaxga,T7fs cpagpaxov mcov dnk- 
davev (died of drinking), dioyivns Xv%vov psd* 
fftisgav (by day) dyjas, dvdgconov, %cpn, "Cvtco. 
C Q nals i^eXQcov xal 6v%vov %govov diaTgtipas, 
fjxsv dycov tov iikXXovTa Saosiv to cpdgpaxov, iv 
xvXixi (psgovza TBTgifiLiivov. Zcov 6 cpavXos xal 
Oavoov xoXd&Tac. 

Remark 1. The participle with the article is 
used where in Latin and English the relative 
and verb are employed ; as, 6 kolcov, he who 
does (qui facit) ; 6 Tgtycov, he that runs ; 6 [3ov- 
Xollevos, he that chooses ; b xaTnyogcov, he that 
accuses, the accuser ; r) anoXoyia tov opevyovTos, 
the plea of the defendant. 

Exercises. 
Ov% o £%k> v TtXudTa £v8aL(jLOviataT6s ioziv, 
dXX' 6 <jO(pG)TaTOS (ov. c TtdvTa dtoix&v xal 
(JtaTaTTcov dsos idTi. Uavzl tS ahovvn doQi\ae- 
tcll. C H dXijdsta tovs elSot as [iiya Gxpsfajasi. 
Tov fxiv sv [it nzTtoivxoTa, cpiXov slvai rj/ovpai, 
Toy 8i TzgoSaoovTa i%Qgov. c O xgijcfi^ sldas, 
ov% 6 rcoXX eldcos oocpos. c O cpdovcov, iavTOv cos 
tyOgov Xvtzu. O tcov Usgacov fiadiXsvs, 6 tov 
' ylOco dtogvl-asi 6 tov ' EXXy\guovtov £ff'|as, 6 yijv 
xai vdcog tovs a EXXirv as acTcov, b ToXfiSv iv Tats 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. Ill 

irtidToXais ygdcp£iv on dscf7i6iij9 icfrlv dndvTcov 
dvQgcontov dq>' r)Xtov dviovTos {i£XQ L 8vo[iivov, 
vvv ov Ttegl tov xvgcos hegcov elvac Siaycdvi££- 
tcu, dkV rjdtj nsgi irjs tov acofxaios ocoTrfgias. 

Remark 2. Many verbs, as those signifying 
to know, to see, to show, to appear, to remember 
and forget, to begin and end, take after them a 
participle instead of an infinitive ; as, olBa av- 
tov aocpov ovtol, I know him to be wise (scio eum 
sapientem esse). 

Exercises. 
tplkvKTth, (ASfivTjtio dvOgconos civ, Otda Ovq-ios 
cov. IlavcioujQs dSixovvrss. Ovs dv ogco (whom- 
soever I may see) zd xaXd iTtiTTjSsvovT as, tov- 
tovs Tif.ir\6G}. 3 AvdgcoTtos cov, fii^vyao T7\v xotvrjv 
tv/tiv ooi ovaav. <Pavsgds iaziv rjdixrjfiivos vtz* 
eiiov. Oi vofxot qpaivovTai fiXdmovTes r/fxdg. 
c Ogco Trjv Tv%tjv tjialv avXXa^dvovoav xal tov 
ndgovTa xaigov awaycovt^o^vov. At §7ti0v[iicu 
0V710TS Xr\yov6iv atxi%6[i£vou tocs yjv%ds tcov dv- 
Qgconcov sot 3 dv dg%coGiv avzcov. <Pavegos yv 6 
Kvgos, si tls tl dyadov 7} xaxov jzoujostsv uvtov, 

VlXCiV 7t£ig6[A£VOS. 

Tgvlkos, 6 &£vocpcovios vtos, iv Tjj pd%r) it£gi 
MavTiv£iav tti/vgdos dycovi<jd[i£vos £T£X£vtt]G£v. 
°Ev TOLVTjf Tjj H<d%Ti xal ? Ena^ivavdas £7t£6£v. 
*Aitayy£ XOivros 8i &£vocpcovTi tov OavaTov tov 
nouSos, ovx iSdxgv6£, dXld ydg, £cpr}, jjd£tv dvq- 
tov y£/£vvrix6s. 



112 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

^ 75. MIDDLE VOICE. (See § 54.) 

1. The middle voice has a reflexive signifi- 
cation, and denotes, 1. an action terminating in 
or upon the agent ; as, cpoj3sco, I terrify. (po/3ov- 
[acu, I fear, Xovco, I wash, Xovofxai, I wash my- 
self cpvXdzzco, I guard, cpvXdzzopai, I guard 
myself, I beware of (with an Ace.) ; 2. an ac- 
tion performed for the agent, or with reference 
to him ; as, xazsozgsyjazo toV M-qdov, he sub- 
dued to himself the Mede. 

2. It is sometimes causative ; as, kva, I loose, 
I release, Xvoficu, I cause to be released, I ran- 
som. 

Exercises. 

<&vkdzzcd tov Xsovza, <&vXdzzoLLai Xsovza 
sntcpsgo^svov. ' EXovds to sllov ocoLia xal dnsX- 
dcov slovdazo. Xgij nsidsiv zovg cpilovs xal jisl- 
dsodat zolg voices. <P6fisi zovg xaxovg xal cpo- 
ftov zovg Osovg. ' Ejzsidi] Oscl acozrjgsg xviidzav 
ELii s^stkovzo, in igyaciav zgsvjoLLai. " Edv lis 
ol dsol ex xivdvvov dnaXXd^coat, duo zavzijg zrjg 
yfjs arcaXXd^oiiat. /tiaXvoixivov dvOganov, ij 
vjvyr\ ovzs nagovda ovzs diziovca ogdzai. f H 
Ildvdsta, dxLvdxijv nakai nagsaxsvaoLLSvij oepdr- 
Z8L eavzijv ' ol 8s svvov%oi, Idovzss zo ysysvrjLLS- 
vov, anaoaLisvoL xdxslvoi zovg dxtvdxag, dno- 
Ofdzzovzai. Kvgog si'sduoazo zd bnXa d 6 
jidizuog avzco s^sjiskolt^zo. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 113 

§ 76. EXERCISES ON VERBS IN p. 

Je%o[,icu rjSias oaa pot didcos. Tds [xexafioXds 
xrjs xv%ys ysvvaicos initixaoo (pigecv. Ovdiv avsv 
Ttovov Beds St8(D(jLv dvdganoLs. Xgovos Sixaiov 
dvSga 8eixvvai [xovos. 'Agsxrj, xdv ddvq xis, 
ovx dno'k'kvxai. Geos ndvxa xiQy\oiv om\ OiXsL. 
Avxovgyov, xov Osvxa ylax£dou i uovLOis vofiovs, 
docpSxaxov slvai i]yov[xou. e O vo^tos ksyec o 
[irj xaxidov fjirj hapfiavs. Mkya xaxov xo fxrj 
dvvaodai cpiguv xaxov. <Paol xovs <Polvixas 
ovx If dg%ijg svguv xd ygdfipaxa, dXXd xovs xv- 
itovs [iqvov [.uxaduvai. KaxoXoylas dcpioxaao, 
STtaivsi paXXov ndvxas dvOgcoitovs. Tovxov xov 
vdfiov 6 deos xiOetxsv • et xi dyadov dieses, nagd 
6£aviov lafii. Mrj dit-aoQs xr^v vijoov, ei 8i8co- 
aiv, dXXd (itf d7todt3ioai. 

§ 77. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON 
THE VERBS. 

zfjjfioodevovs SLTtovxog 1 ngos xov (Paxiava, 
dnoxxsvovoi as ^Adyjvatoi Idv [xavaoi, vat, bitcsv, 
ipi [isv, idv [xavcooi, as 8i, idv aacpgovcoai. Tds 
piv xav (pavXcov avvijOsias oXiyos %govos SiiXv- 
cfs 2 ' xds Si xdov anovSaicov cpikias ov8° dv 6 nds 
aicov s<-aXsivjsisv. IlgsTtsi xovs dot-Tjs bgsyofxs- 
vovs s xav cutovSaicov dXXd firj xav (pavXcov sivai 
[Mfiijxds. c P6)^7i [isxd fxsv (pgovtfascos GHpiXrjasv, 
dvsv di xwvxy\s nXsico xovs s/ovxas sfiXavjs • 
xal xd [isv ocofxaxa xeov daxovvxcov ixoaprias xais 



114 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

8s T^js vjvyjjs inipsXsiais in saxoTijo sv. C H zijg 
dgsTijs xzrjois nXovTov xgsiTTcov, ^g^OL^KOTsga sv- 

ySVSLaS SOIL. 

1 Demosthenes saying, Gen. Absolute. — 2 diskvoe, dis- 
solves. So below (ocpsliioEv, aids, splays, injures. — 3 tovq 
.... OQE/ofisvovg, those aspiring, or striving after glory. 

Mi\8snoTS fxj^dsv aia/gov noirjoas sXmU Xij- 
dsiv 1, xal ydg av 2 tovs dXXovs XdOys, osavTco 
ys 3 gvvsi8ijgsls. 

Mij8sva qpiXov noiov nglv av s^STaays nas 
xiXQifTai tois Ttgojsgov cpiXois. *' EXniC,s ydg av~ 
tov xal nsgl os ysvijasaOac toiovtov olos xal nsgl 
ixsivovs ysyovsv. 

2?Tsgys fxsv id nagovTa, &jtsi 8s rd fisXzict). 
Nofxi^s [Mfdiv slvai tcov avdgonivcov fisfiatov • 
ovtco ydg, ovz\ svtv%cqv, say nsgi%agiqs, ovts 
8v<jtv%cov, nsgiXvnos. 

1 Hope that you will escape notice. — 2 av same as idv, if. 
— 3 owvioi ye, with yourself certainly, at least. 

Tovs cpiXovs svegysrovvTes xal 1 tovs i/Ogovs 
SwijasaOs xoXdX,siv. z/ioysvrjs sXsysv 2 oil 01 
fxiv dXXot xvvss tovs i%0govs 8dxvovaiv, syco 8s 
tovs (piXovs, iVa ctGoGG). ^4i8ovs nagd ndaiv 3 
d^ios soy idv ngazov ciggys oavTov ai8stodai. 
KgsiTTOv els xogaxas i\ sis xoXaxas ipnsosiv 4, 
ol fjtiv ydg vsxgovs, oi 8s &)i/tgcs iaQiovdiv. 
c HyovfjtsOa tov OdvaTov slvai ti)v Trjs vjv%rjs 
and tov oapaTos dnaXXayyv. UoXsf.iovs xal 
dTaasLs xal [idyas ov8sv dXXo nags%si ij to cfcofia 
xal at tovtov snidvpiai * 8id ydg ti\v tcov X9V' 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 115 

[idrcdv xxrJGLv ndvTes ot n6Xe[ioi r^iiv yiyvovjai. 
1 H uiv ipv%)j eoix£ tS dsicp, to 8i dapa ta 6vij- 

T(D. 

1 nod, also. — 2 lltysv, used to say. — 3 nagoc naaiv, in the 
estimation of all. — 4 efcnlmw. 

% 78. ENGLISH INTO GREEK. 

1. Active. 

/ am writing. I was writing. I have written 
a letter. Thou hast written to me a letter. 1 
will write to you. I was writing when you came 
(sg/ofjiai). / was coming when you wrote. I 
was writing when you were coming. I had writ- 
ten when he came. Go to writing. Do not write. 
Let him write to me a letter. Do not keep writ- 
ing. If he should write, I should not come (si 
ygdipat ovx dv sX0oi[ii). 

2. Passive. 

The letter is written (has been). The letter is 
(being) written (scribitur). The letter shall have 
been written. If he comes (idv ehdj}) it shall 
not be written. If these things are written. If 
these things should be written. Let the letter be 
written. Let my words be written. Thy law is 
written in my heart. The letter had been written 
when he came. The law was written (eygdcpdif) 
on stone. 

3. The soul of man is not seen. 1 (Edipus 
slew 12 his father Laius, discovered 3 the enigma 



116 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

of the Sphinx, and married 4 his mother, Iocaste. 
Learn and then teach. 5 God sees the hearts of 
men and knows 6 their sentiments.' 1 Plato taught 
(used to teach) in the Academy. What shall I 
do? God sent* his son into the world. All 
the wicked are punished* in Hades, both kings 
and servants, rich and poor. The Hellespont 
was called 10 from Helle dying in it. He that 
knows these things will do them. To do the will 
of God brings u happiness. 

1 oqu.(x). — 2 Aor. ocntxTsivs. — 3 £%£VQL(jx£iv. — 4 ya^iiio. — 
5 diduay.oi. — 6 yiyiwoy.w. — ~ didroia. — 8 nsfinw. — 9 y.oXd- 
£<y. — 10 xaXew. — n cpigca. 

§ 79. PREPOSITIONS. 

These govern three cases, the Genitive, Da- 
tive, and Accusative. 

Gen. dvxi, duo, ex, ttqo. 

Dat. Iv, avv. 

Ace. eis, dvd (dvd, in the poets, governs also 
the dative). 

Gen. and Ace. did, xaid, vjieg. 

Gen., Dat., and Ace. d[Mpi, ini, (.isrd, nagd^ 

7TSQI, 71QOS, V7t6. 

The fundamental idea of the genitive is that 
of going forth, proceeding out of or from ; that 
of the dative (the case of the remote object), 
approach, nearness. The accusative denotes the 
immediate object of the transitive verb; hence 
the idea of motion toward, reaching foricard, 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 117 

and attaining. The meaning of the preposi- 
tions is often modified to correspond with these 
several ideas ; thus, 

With Gen. ix, out of, dno, from ; Dat. iv, in, 
dvv, with; Ace. els, into. 

nagd, along side of G. from the side of D. by 
the side of A. to or toward the side of; hence, 
G. from, D. with, at, A. to, toward. 

ngos, to, G. from to (ab), on the part of, D. 
close to, A. to, against. 

1. Prepositions governing the Genitive. 

*Avti, over against, against; hence, in ex- 
change, one thing against, instead of, another, 
instead of, for (its usual meaning) ; Sovhos dv- 
zi fiaailias ' dvd 3 &v, for which things. 

'' ' Ano, from ; as, and rrjs nokecog, an ixeivov 
tov xqovov ' hence, arising from, springing 
from, by reason of; 6 and noXspicov cpofios, the 
fear arising from the enemy; and dtxaioavvip, 
from, by reason of, his justice. 

3 Ex, out of; ex Trjg nokem ■ hence, one thing 
out of another in point of time, after ; as an 
effect, in consequence of, from, by, ex noleiiov 
xaxd ■ ex tovtov, after this, or in consequence 
of this ; ex cpiXcov neiodelaa, persuaded by her 
friends. 

Ugo, before; ngd t??s nolecos, ngd tov noXepov, 
noXepov ngo eig-qvns, war before (in preference 
10 



118 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

to) peace; before, by way of protection and 
defence, for, on behalf of pd/sodou ttqo najgi- 
8os. 

2. Prepositions governing the Dative. 
3 Ev, in ; iv Tjj noXw iv ravzy rrj fjpsga, in or 
on this day ; hence, iv ooi iap,ev, ice are in thee, 
i. e. altogether dependent upon thee ; hence, as 
that on which the doing of something depends, 
through or by ; iv vo^odhais OsoOcu vo^iov, to 
enact a law by means of JYomotheta ; iv Xaols, 
in, i. e. among the people. 

JZvv, together with; ?JA0£ tivv Msvzlaco, he 
came with Menelaus ; hence, on the side of, cvv 
"EXhjGiv etvai, and with the aid of, ivixnae avv 
*A0nva, he conquered in connexion with, i. e. 
with the aid of Minerva. 

3. Prepositions governing the Accusative. 

Els, into ; elaijXdov els ti)v tcoXlv • to ; as, 
ixsio sis Kqsovtol, he came to Creon. I do 
this into a thing, i. e. for a thing, with respect to 
a thing ; hence variously rendered, according 
to the connexion, for, on account of, with respect 
to, toward, against, before ; as, inatvelv tlvol els 
tl, to praise any one for any thing ; us Ttva si- 
tcelv, to speak to, or before any one ; els to Isq6i> 
ijoepow, they committed impiety in respect to, or 
toward the temple. 

Avu, up, along up ; dvd xov noja^ov nXisiv, 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 119 

to sail up the river. This meaning is rare ; gen- 
erally, throughout, along over ; dvd ti\v *A<siay, 
along over, throughout Asia ; dvd otooctoV, 
throughout the army ; dvd ndvxa xd sin, along, 
during all years ; dvd xgdros, up to o?ie's power. 

*Avd, with the poets, governs the Dative, and 
signifies upon; xgvasa dvd ax-q7tjgco. 

4. Prepositions governing the Genitive 
and Accusative. 

did, through. Gen. to £y%os fjhde did tov 66- 
gaxos ' hence (as that which we go through is 
the means of arriving at a given object), by 
means of; thus, did itoXk^ov yiyvsxai Okiyjig, 
through, by means of war comes affliction ; dis- 
Ai/fro aviois 6V igpwvsas, he conversed with 
them through an interpreter. 

Ace. through (poetic) ; Sid dco^aia, through 
the mansion. On account of; did ravra, on ac- 
count of these things, viz. either retrospectively, 
in consequence of these things, or prospectively, 
for the sake of these things. 

KoLxd, down. Gen. down from ; xard tSv 
rtsigav giuxeiv xivd, to cast any one down from 
the rocks; hence, under; xaxd x6v xv^idxcov, 
down in respect to, i. e. under the ivaves ; xaxd 
axonov, down in relation to a mark, — at or against 
a mark; thus against, its ordinary meaning with 
Attic writers, chiefly of language, thoughts, 
&c. ; s iTtsiv xaxd xivog, to speak against any one. 



120 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

Sometimes more general, in relation to; thus, 
ot Inaivoi xaxd rrjs Ttoksas, the praises lavished 
on the state. 

Ace. as relates to, according to, the general 
relations to be modified by the connexion ; 
xad° a O{i7]Qov, according to Homer ; xard yrpr 
xal xard 6d).aoaav, in respect to, i. e. by land 
and sea ; ol xax *Aoiav bvrss, those who are 
in Asia ; [isi&v laxly i\ xaxd dvdgconov, he is 
greater than according to man, — greater than 
human ; xard nokeis, according to cities, — city 
by city ; dicupsgsi xaid to peysdos, he surpasses 
(as to, as it respects) in stature. 

'Ytzzq, over, above. Gen. above with verbs of 
rest ; to vdag vtcsq tcov {.laGxcov icpaivBzo, the 
water appeared above their breasts ; l| AiQioni- 
ag t^s vTzig AiyviiTov, from JEthiopia ichich is 
beyond Egypt ; hence, over by way of defence 
and protection, on behalf of, for ; vttsq tcov c EX- 
hjvoov [.idxstidai, to fight for the Greeks; hence, 
in relation to ; si xd nagd dot xaXcos e%£i, Odg- 
gst vneg Ixuvcov, if thy affairs are prosperous, 
be of good courage in relation to them. 

Ace. over, with verbs of motion ; fidXleiv 
vntg tijv oixiav, to cast it over the house ; above, 
beyond, with verbs of rest ; vnig Xoyov, above 
description ; KXiag/og iTtoXe^sc tols Ogai-l rots 
vneg c E\h\cinovTOv oixovai. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 121 

5. Prepositions governing the Genitive, 
Dative, and Accusative. 

*A[.i(pi, about. Gen. and Dat. about, concern- 
ing, on account of; d^Kpl ttjs noXscog • dficpl to 
(jiofxan ' dpq)' 'Elevq fxd%£60cu, to fight on ac- 
count of Helen ; Toijjd' d^icpl yvvcuxl noXvv 
%qovov dXysa nda^etv. 

Ace. about, in the vicinity of; d^icpl zd og-q 
iysvero, he was about, i. e. in the neighbourhood 
of the mountains; d^yi ti s%eiv, to be occupied 
about any thing. 

*Em, upon. Gen. inl noXsco? jSco^Sv, upon the 
altars of the city ; hence, at, by ; inl ttJs OaXda- 
6n?, u P on > a t M %e sea i %*' r)fiSv, upon us, i. e. in 
our time. 

Dat. close upon, by ; inl tS nora^a, close by, 
by the river ; hence, dependent upon ; ovx sazou 
inl tco ddsXcpS, he will not be dependent on his 
brother ; inl dagoes, dependent upon gifts, on 
condition of gifts ; inl tovtois, on these condi- 
tions. 

Ace. upon, with verbs of motion ; dvsnidrjosv 
inl toV innov, he leaped upon the horse; to, 
against ; rjXavvsv inl to nddos, he rode to the 
fatal spot ; iivai inl tovs noXepwvs, to go against 
the enemy. 

MsTa (psoos, middle,) implies connexion, 
community, being in the midst of a thing; hence, 
Gen. with, among, in connexion with; ^sra 
10* 



122 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

vsy.gav y.uadai, to lie among the dead; (.uja <jv{i- 

[id%&v fld%£6dai. 

Dat. (Poet.) among ; ^urd ozgaTcd, fierd %sg- 
ctiv, in the midst of, i. e. in his hands. 

Ace. In Homer, among, with verbs of motion 
and also of rest ; sfin ngos ovgavov pierd daipo- 
vas dXXovs. With Attic writers, next, next af- 
ter, after ; 2Jdg3eis, nofas nXovoiaTazi] pszd Ba- 
fivXcova, Sardis, the richest city next to Babylon; 
[aid zavza, after these things. 

Uagd, by the side of Gen. from the side of, 
from (with reference to source, dno with refer- 
ence to distance) ; dyyeXos nagd fiaGiXecos, a 
messenger from the king ; padslv nagd twos, to 
lectm from any one ; hence, by ; nagd zcov dscov, 
from or by the Gods. 

Dat. with (apud), by one^s side, among; nagd 
(joi xazeXvov, they lodged with thee, — (chez 
vous) at thy house ; nag' i^uv zavza ovzeos iazi, 
with us (where we live) these things are thus ; 
dgzzi) ziudzai, nagd deoig xal nag' dvdgconots • 
hence, in estimation of; nag' i(xoi, with me, i. e. 
in my estimation. 

Ace. to, towards (to the side of), along (along 
side of), nagd zi)v noXiv, to the city ; nagd toV 
noza { uov, along the river ; near (by the side of), 
xgijvq nagd zrjv odov, a fountain near the road ; 
denotes comparison (one thing along side of 
another), in comparison with ; zavzd iazi nag' 
ovoh, these things are in comparison with noth- 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 123 

ing (amount to nothing) ; itagd zd dXXa %coa, 
Saneg Qeol, avdgconot fitozevovcti, in comparison 
with other animals men live as Gods (beyond 
other animals) ; hence, beyond, in violation of, 
contrary to ; itagd zovg vo^iovg, nagd zr\y cpvaiv, 
itagd zds anov^dg. 

Usgi, around, about. Gen. (about), concern- 
ing, respecting ; nsgl zovzcov, concerning these 
things; fid/sadat nsgl nazgiSog, to fight concern- 
ing, for one's country. In Homer, often above ; 
nsgl dXXcov, above others. 

Dat. close about ; nsgl zco azijOst dcogaxa st- 
%zv, he had a coat of mail about his breast ; £<£?>?? 
icegl za aa^tazt. 

Ace. about, in a looser and more general 
sense ; oixovvzai nsgl noza^iov, they dwell about 
the river ; nsgl zovzovg zovg %govovg, about these 
times ; dpagzdveiv nsgi Tiva, to offend about, in 
relation to any one ; acoepgovetv nsgl tovs Osovg. 

Ilgog (ngo), to (in, or into the sight of). 

Gen. (from the presence of) from, by, on the 
part of (a very general relation) ; ngog ivos dg- 
%£o6cu xdXXiazov • iXsvdsgog lazi ngog nazgog 
xal ngog fiyzgog, he is free on the part of, as 
respects his father and his mother ; o,zc Sixato- 
zazov xal ngog Oecov xal ngog dvdgancov, what- 
ever is most just, on the part of, in the estimation 
of Gods and men. 

Dat. close to, near or by; ngog zS nozafxeo* 



124 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

(close upon) in addition to ; ngos tovtols, in ad- 
dition to these things. 

Ace. to, with verbs of motion ; ukyatu ngos 
tov avSga ■ toward ; ngos ti]v 1)6, toward the 
east; towards a thing is with reference to a thing, 
with relation to, on account of, a thing ; ngos 
TGc^Ta, toward, with reference to, on account of 
these things ; xaXos ngos dgopov, excellent in re- 
spect to, or for running; hence used in com- 
parisons ; ngos deov nidijxos (pavstrat, in respect 
to God, i. e. in comparison with God, he will ap- 
pear an ape ; ngos ti}v d^tav ixdarco idiSooav, 
they gave to each one with respect to, according 
to, his desert ; against; [.irj XcLxtlU ngos xivrga, 
do not kick against the pricks. 

c Tno, under. Gen. vno %0ov6s, under the earth 
(with verbs of rest) ; often bij, to denote the 
agent with passive verbs ; inaivovvxai vno tcov 
noXXSv, they are praised by the multitude. 

Dat. close under ; vno jrj nolsi, close under, 
near to the city ; hence, subject to ; vno ^aatXel 
zlvai, to be subject to a king. 

Ace. under, with verbs of motion ; vno tovs 
noSas tov innov xvav vnidga^is * ata/LdTos dvijg 
vno "Ifaov rjX0e ■ vno tovs amovs %govovs, 
about the same time. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 125 

§ 80. GENERAL SUMMARY. 

We give the following condensed view of 
the ordinary significations of the prepositions. 
The student will be careful, however, always 
to endeavour to trace remoter senses back to 
the primary, as is partially done in the preced- 
ing section. 

Prep, with Gen. 

dvxi, over against, — instead of, for. 

dno, from, — springing from (source), after, 
by reason of, by. 

ix, out of, — from (source), after, in conse- 
quence of, by means of, by. 

ngo, before, — on behalf of, for. 

Prep, with Dat. 
Iv, in, — among, on, by. 
dvv, together with, — with the aid of. 

Prep, with Ace. 

s is, into, — to, toward, against, — with respect 
to, for. 

dvd, along up, — up to, throughout, during, 
Dat. (Poet.) upon. 

Prep, with Gen. and Ace. 

Sid, Gen. through, by means of; Ace. (through, 
Poet.), on account of. 

xazd, Gen. down from, under, against, in re- 
lation to y Ace. in relation to, according to, at. 



126 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

vjtig, Gen. over, above, beyond, on behalf of, 
in relation to ; Acc. over, beyond. 

Prep, with Gen., Dat., and Ace. 

apcpi, Gen. and Dat. about, concerning, on ac- 
count of; Acc. about, in the vicinity of 

iiti, Gen. upon, at or by, toward, in the time 
of; Dat. close upon, by, dependent on, in addi- 
tion to ; Acc. upon, to, against. 

fisid, Gen. among, together with; Dat. (poet.) 
among ; Acc. next, after. 

nagd, Gen. from, by (chiefly with persons) ; 
Dat. with, in presence of, in the estimation of; 
Acc. to, toward, near, along, in comparison with, 
beyond, contrary to. 

7Tqos, Gen. on the side of, toward, from, on the 
part of, by ; Dat. close upon, before, in addition 
to ; Acc. to, toward, against, for or with refer- 
ence to. 

Ttsgi, Gen. around, about, concerning; Dat. 
close about; Acc. about (more loosely). 

V7z6, Gen. under, by ; Dat. close under, subject 
to; Acc. under (with motion). 

^ 81. REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS. 

1. After verbs of motion toward, the prepo- 
sition generally (though not always) governs the 
accusative ; with those of rest, a genitive or 
dative ; as, nagd ftaatXia, to the presence of the 
king ; nagd ftaaiXu, with or in the presence of 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 127 

the king ; 7? acpaiga ninrsi hit zrjv jgdns'Cav, the 
ball falls upon the table ; y\ acpatga Tcsixai inl 
Trjs rgans^g, the ball lies upon the table; r\ 
acpaiga xsirai inl Tjj jgani£t}, the ball lies close 
upon (by) the table; i\ acpaiga xvVivdexai vno 
jgdns'Cav, the ball is rolling under the table ; i\ 
acpaiga yceijat vno jganifys, the ball lies under 
the table ; 77 acpaiga xsirai vno TgansZy, the ball 
lies close under, at the foot of, the table ; iq 
acpaiga xgspdvvvrai vnig jgansfys, the ball is 
suspended over the table ; y\ acpaiga ginxszat 
vnig jgdne£av, the ball is thrown over the table. 

2. Mbxd with the genitive, and avv with the 
dative both indicate connexion with, but fiexd 
(from fisaos, middle,) more intimate union, a 
mutual contact; as, fierd vsxgcov xsiaopai, I shall 
lie together with, among, in the midst of, the 
dead. 

3. c Tno, by, is most frequently used to de- 
note the agent with passive verbs ; vno tov 8tj- 
piov arscpavovrai, he is crowned by the people; 
often, however, nagd and ngos with the geni- 
tive, and sometimes even ix and dno. They 
are sometimes used in the same way with in- 
transitive verbs, particularly Ovijaxeiv, to die, 
and nda%eiv, to suffer; as, vno "JExiogos dnida- 
vb, he died by Hector. 

4. Kara, against, is used chiefly with refer- 
ence to speaking, thinking, acting. Motion 



128 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

against is expressed by ngos and Ini' Xsyuv 
ocard tlvos, to speak against any one ; Uvai Ini 
Tiva, to go against any one. 

§ 82. EXAMPLES. 
1. olxia, house, 

avji Trjs olxias, instead of or for the house. 

and tijs olxias, from the house. 

ix Trjs olxias, out of the house. 

TtQo Trjs olxias, before the house. 

iv jjj olxia, in the house. 

dvv txj olxia, together with the house. 

els Tijv olxiav, into the house. 

dvd xrjv olxiav, throughout the house. 

8cd Trjs olxias, through the house. 

did ti\v olxiav, on account of the house. 

ytaTa ttjs olxias, down from the house. 

^cctoc ti]v olxtav, at or in the house. 

vnsQ Trjs olxias, (to be) over the house, in re- 
lation to or for the house. 

vtisq ttjv olxiav, (to go) over or beyond the 
house. 

dpcpi Trjs olxias, about or concerning the house. 

dficpl Tjj olxia, about the house. 

dfxcpt Tijv olxiav, about the house. 

87TL Trjs olxias, (to be) upon the house. 

Inl Tij olxia, close upon, near to the house. 

inl Tijv olxiav, (to go) upon, to, against the 
house. 

^arcc ttjs olxias, together with the house. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 129 

psrd Tats olxiais, (poet.) among the houses. 

(xsTci tijv olxiav, next to the house. 

nagd Trjs oixias, from, by the house. 

Ttagd itfv olxiav, to, toward, near, beyond the 
house. 

nsgl rrjs oixias, concerning the house. 

nsgl Ttj olxia, close about the house. 

nsgl Tiqv olxiav, about, in the vicinity of the 
house. 

ngos rijs oixias, on the part of, in relation to 
the house. 

ngos jy olxia, close upon, near the house. 

ngos t^V olxiav, to, against, with reference to 
the house. 

vtco jrjs oixias, under the house; vn avdgcn- 
nov, by a man. 

vno ttj olxia, close under, at the foot of the 
house. 

vno tt\v olxiav, (to go) under the house. 

2. UoXs^os, rear. 

ix nolspov, (out of) after or in consequence 
of war. 

did noXspov, through war, by means of war. 
iv noXspco, in war. 
els noXspov, into or for war. 
did noXspov, on account of war. 
nagd noXsuov, during war. 
avd noXsuov, during war. 
11 



130 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

xazd noXsp.ov, in relation to war, in war or 
by war. 

vtzsq 7to?J[Aov, in behalf of, in relation to war. 

ducpi or TiSQi noXsfxov (eivcu), to be occupied 
about, engaged in tear. 

Ttegl 7toXSfiov 9 concerning war* 

7zq6s tioXe^lov, to or for war. 

paid 710X8 pov, in connexion with war. 

pezd noXepov, after the war. 

3. Sentences. 

JToXXd pot hdcoxsv sis oxgaxov, he gave me 
many things for an army (to enable me to raise 
an army). 

Uqos tovs Ogaxas inoXspvaa, I fought against 
the Thracians. 

'Yrtig Tijg c JEXXd8os htpogovpijv ps& vpcov, 
on behalf of Greece, I punished them, in con- 
nexion ivith you. 

* JlcpsXovv Kvgov dvd' cov sv Inadov vn ixsc- 
vov, I assisted Cyrus in return for the favors 
which I received from him. 

% AvknvhvGa ex aov, I recovered breath by 
means of thee. 

ITgos ixstvois tl (pi\g ; what dost thou say in 
addition to those things ? 

^TiiajiTevov htl fiacfiXia livai, pi6dcodr\vai 8i 
ovx B7il tovtco lepaaav, they suspected they were 
going against the king, and they said they were 
not hired for this (upon condition of this). 



STUDY OP THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 131 

Aid vfigiv avrov ragaTrofxsda ix tov pvSiv 
xpgovri&iv <dv i/gyv, we are disturbed on account 
of his insolence, in consequence of not paying the 
necessary attention to our affairs. 

AvO* &v vpsis V7t£g vficov avrcov TiLiagijcao'dE, 
in return for which things do you on behalf of 
yourselves inflict punishment 

§ 83. EXERCISES ON PREPOSITIONS. 

1 . 'UksifisTO avrrj rd ddxgva xard 1 rcov ita- 
gsi&v. H6?*£(ios r(v Kvgcp ngos UsiaiSas xal 
Mvaovs. Kara ids dvgas tov dgfiarscov dicpgov 
dvsfiaivev' 2 im to agua, Usigo) opoios nsgl 
ixslvov elvai, oios Ttsg xal ixstvos negl as. Toi- 
ovros yivov nsgl rovs yovsis oiovs dv ev^aio 3 
Ttsgl a s avrov ylvsadai tovs asavrov nalBas. 
ZtJtsi ry}v ix xov noXifiov dcorngtav Lisrd xaXijs 
dot-rjs, dXXd lit} psr* aio%gds (prjiivs. ' O cos 7ta- 
Tijg iv Tjjde t# pid r^isga. l| dcpgovos ocDcpgcov 
yeyiviirai. 

1 vara, down. — 2 dvsjScuvev, he was mounting. — 3 oiovg 
av tv^ato, as you would pray, ivish. 

2. Flag* ipoi Ssijasi ds tixnvovv <7vv tols dots 
rs xal siiots (pilots. — 'Yxig rrjs xafirjs yrjkocpos 
ijv. O ovv KX£ag%os ovx dvsfiifia'Csv inl tov 
Xocpov, a?.V V7t 3 avzov drr\Gas to argdzsvtia 
7iEfX7t£t Avxiov tov Hvgaxovaiov xal dXXov inl 
tov Xocpov xal xsXsvet, xaridovras rd vvzsg tov 
Xocpov, ti ioTiv duayyelXaL. Kal 6 Avxios 



132 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

TjXacts, xal Idcov dnayyiXXei, oxi cpsvyovotv dvd 
xgaTOs. — * AnoQvrjaxuv del ngo tov ddixuv. JZov 
acpcovov xclt ixsivovs tovs %govovs iv toxs ix- 
xkTjtfiais xadrjfiivov iyco nagtXQcov ikeyov. *Ev 
tw Osco to tovtov tsXos ijv, ovx iv ifioL 

3. Xenophon's Jnabasis, I. 2. 
/fid fiiaov tov nagadsioov get 6 Maiavdgos 
noTapos * al di nijyal avxov elctiv ix tcov fiaat- 
Xsicov - gel di xal did Tijs KeXaivcov noXecos. 
Ectl di xal fxsydXov fiaoiXicos j3aGiksia iv Ke- 
Xaivals igvpvd, inl Tats nijyals tov Magovov 
TTOTtXfiov, vno Tjj dxgonoXet • gu di xal ovtos 
Sid ttJs nolEcos, xal ififidkXei els tov Maiavdgov, 
'JSvTavda XiyeTai ^AnoXXcov ixdetgai Magavav, 
vix-qdas (avTov) igt£ovTa ol negl oocpias, xal to 
digfia xgsfidoat iv t6 6ivTgcp y bOev al nijyai' 
Sid di tovto b noTa^os xaXetTat Magovas. 

4. Xen. Mem. I. 3, 4. 

El di ti do^scev HcoxgaTei ci^iaiveoQai nagd 
tcov decov, ijttov av ineiodrj l Ttagd 2 rot oij^atvo- 
fxsva noirjoai, y et tls avTov enetdev 2, odov Xa- 
fteiv qyepova TvcpXov xal firj eldoTa ti]v odov 
dvxl ftXinovTOS xal eldoxos* xal tcov dXXcov di 
ficogiav xaTyjyogei* otTives nagd id vno tcov dscov 
0ijf.iaLv6i.uva noLovoi t*, cpvXaTTOfievoi Tyv nagd 
tols dvQgconoLS ddo^lav. Avtos di ndvTa tccv- 
Ogconiva vnegecoga ngos 5 ti)v nagd tcov Qecov 
!-v[.iftov)uav. 

1 He would have been leas persuaded. — 2 notQu, contrary 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 133 

to. — 3 Endeavoured to persuade him. — 4 xm xmv alXwv de 
{MtiqLav xaTtiyoQU, and he accused others too of folly. — 
5 Tigog, in comparison with. 

§ 84. PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSI- 
TION. 

1. Prepositions compounded with verbs gen- 
erally add their own import to that of the sim- 
ple verb ; they also have in composition the 
same variety of meanings as when standing 
alone; thus, 'kaufidvuv, to take, [israXafjiftdvsiv, 
to take in connexion with, to participate ; fiaiveiv, 
to go, diafiaivsiv, to go through, ixfiaiveiv, to go 
out, dnofiaLvsiv, to go away, dvaftalvuv, to go 
up, xajafiaiv&Lv, to go down; xajaXiyetv, to 
speak against 

2. Exercises on Prepositions in Com- 
position. 

UagecfTijxs rots fia^OLS id Ovftara. *Ex tov- 
tov us tovs icpijfiovs £%£g%ovrai. c O Kvgos tivvs- 
xdXsos tovs ozgaxriyovs. Kvgos, inti ela^Xaoev 

StS Tr\V TtoXtV, p£T£7l£^IC£T0 Hv£VV£OiV 7ZgOS iav- 

tov. JJcoxgdrns negisXQcov, insidrj 01 fiagvvsGdai 
h'(prf rd oxsXv, icaT£x?uOri vmios, Ov (livovaa i\ 
xpv%ij iv TW oSfian ovva7io0vrJ6X£i. 3 JSfxoi 86s 
ravTa oitcos iyco diadco rots jftixicoicus. — "Ojs 
fiiv £i<jrjXOo(iEv £is zrjv axr/vrjv avTjjs, to ngaiov 
ov ddyvcd^v avzrjv, as Si dvaoifjvcu avxiqv ixs- 
X£v<ja{i£v, (jvvav£6T7\aav p.iv aviij ndaai at d(.upi 
avxijv • 8irjv£yx£ Si ivravda, ngcorov piv, rep p,s- 
11* 



134 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

yiQsi, £7t8Lza di, xal xij dgsrfj. c J2g ovv tovto 
rjxovctsv y yvvy, nsgLxaTsggifeaTQ ts tov dvcoOsv 
nenXov, xai dvcodvgaTO ' owave^oijaav di avTjj 
xal at dpaaL. — *JL (jlsv inlGzaoai, diacpvXaTTE 
Tats [aXixais ' d di tnj LisiidOyxas, 7tgooXaLi(3av£ 
tolls iniaxyiiats. Uoxa^tdv diafiaivztv. Kal 
fiaoiXsvs dxovoas nagd Tiooayigvovs xov Kv- 

gov oxoXov, dvTL7iagS67C8vd£sTO. 

§ 85. EXERCISES ON THE PREPO- 
SITIONS. 

English into Greek. 
All good things 1 come from God. The mes- 
senger ivas sent 2 by the king. From war are 
many evils. With thee is a fountain of life. 
The river of life is from the throne of God, and 
near it is the tree of life. After ivar is peace, 
after day night, after life death. He departed 3 
from the city, and went through the plain to the 
river. I sit {xddi^iat) by the side of the old 
man. 4 The sun moves 5 above 6 the earth. All 
injustice is contrary to the laiv of God. Thy law 
is in my heart. Peace shall be with you. The 
brave man 7 fights for his country, but the cow- 
ard prefers his own safety to 8 (before) that of 
his country. I lead d the army along the river. 

1 niivra tu uyafiu. — 2 aJtoatiXXto. — 3 anioxo^im. — 4 Otd 
man, vtQWV. — 5 Moves, noQfvnai. — G Above, vjtsq with 
Gen. — 7 Brave man, avdyeioq. — 8 The coward prefers 
. . . . to, b dedog cuouzvll .... nqo. — 9 1 lead, uyw. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 135 

Jin eye for an eye, and a tooth 1 for a tooth. 
Virtue instead of beauty, 2 and happiness instead 
of pleasure. On account of fear I am not able 
to speak. Move us is the heaven, and beneath 
us is the earth. I descended from the mountain 
and brought a tree with me. What ye hear in 
the darkness, speak in the light. A certain one, 
selling* a house, carried around a stone from it 
for a sample. 4 Those who dwell 5 about the river 
know nothing concerning these things. On ac- 
count of the death of the Cyclops? Jlpollo was 
sent down 7 from heaven into the earth, and 
served 8 in Thessaly with Mmetus. 

1 A tooth, odovg. — 2 Beauty, xaXXog. — 3 Selling, timIwv. 
— 4 uq dtl'/ficc. — 5 ol oixovvTtg. — 6 iw/' KvxXanojv. — 7 Was 
sent down, xaTtne^cfd^T]. — 8 Served, s&rjjsvoev. 

% 86. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
1. Fables. 

Avxos Idcov 7toi[iivas iadiovias Iv axwvj} ngo- 
fiazov, iyyvs tzqogeXO&v, r\kixos, 1 kepi], av -qv do- 
gvfios, el lyco tovto Inoiovv ! 

Akaiva, ovsidi^ofievn vito aXanexos, ini to 2 
did Ttavjos 3 eva tlxtslv, £W, hfpyj, dXXd Xiovxa. 

1 ifkhoc — &6qv($oq, what a tumult there ivould be. — 
2 inl to — tUtuv, for her bringing forth. — 3 xqovov un- 
derstood, in all her lifetime. 



136 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

2. Anecdotes. 

: AgioTimtos igcoTTjdds, Tiva eotIv, a dsi tovs 
7tatSag Liavddvsiv, scpi], ots 1 avdgss yevousvoi 

%Q7jGOVTGU. ^AvTLGdhnjS EQtoTljdsU, TL TCJV [Xadlj- 

LiaTav avayxaioTCiTOv, ecpyjy to xaxd djioiiaduv. 
Zjjvcov ngos to 2 cplvagovv Lieigdxiov, did tovto, 
tins, 8vo oia e%olisv, oiotia 8i IV, iva tiXelco 
Liiv uxovcoluv, TJnova 8e Xsyaiisv. 'y/giazoTsXjfs 
oveidt^oiuvo? 710TS oil Tiovijgco dvdgconco eXz^Lio- 
6vvijv kdaxev, oh tov jgonov, eopi], dXXd tov av- 
dgaizov ijXeijaa. UXdrav ogyi^ofisvos tzots tgj> 
oix£Tt}, i7tLGTavTog s Eevoxgdiovs, Aa/3«V, 4 Zopi], 
Tovjov. iiaoziycoaov * eyco ydg ogyi'CoLiat. 

1 oig . . . . xgrjaovTcu, what they will use. — 2 nqbg to, to 
the talkative, Sfc. — 3 iniOToiviog, standing by. — 4 lupwv 
toiiTov, taking this person, or take this person and. 

3. Plato's Gorgias, ch. 79. 

°J2ozisg "OfiijQOS Xsyei, dLSvei/xavTO xr^v dgyjpr 
6 Zsvs xal 6 Uoaeidav xal 6 TIXoviiov, intiS)} 
nagd tov naigos nagtXafiov • yv ovv votiog ode 
Ttsgl dvdgcojicov ercl Kgovov, 1 xal del xal vvv sxi 
IdTiv Iv Osols, t6v dvdgcoTtov tov iaev dixaias 
tov ftiov diskQovTa xal ogicos, iiteiddv tsXsvtijGtj, 
is iiaxdgcov vijaov? dmovTa olxsiv iv ndar} sv- 
daiiiovia IxTog xaxav, tov 3s ddixcog xal ddecos 
ElS to Tijg Ttoscog ts xal dixijs dedLicoTijgiov, o dij 
Tagiagov xaXovoiv, lev at. 

1 inl Kooroi'j in the time of Saturn. 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 137 

4. From Isocrates. 
Zevs r HgaxXea xai TdvTakov yevvqaas (as 
ot livOol Xeyovdi xai ndvTes mOTevovoi) tov Liev, 
8id Tiqv dgsTrji', dddvazov enoin\Ge ' tov Se, Sta 
Trjv xaxtav, tolls fxeytOTacs Tifxcogcais exokaoev. 
01$ %gij Tcaga8eiy^a6t %gco[iivovs ogeyeodai Trjs 
xaXoxayadias ' xai [xtf liovov tols vcp* r}ficov 
elgrjfisvois ififiivecv, dXXd xai tcdv 71olt^tcov toc 
fieXTiOTa LiavOdveiv, xai tcjv dXXcov cocptOTcov, 
€i ti ygrpuiov elgrjxaaiv, avayiyvacxeiv. "Sloneg 
ydg tj\v fisXiTTav ogSfiev ecp* ditavTa [xev rot 
filaGTifttaTa xaOi^dvovoav, dcp' exaOTOV 8e tcc 
Xgtfoiua XaLtfidvovoav • ovtco %gr) xai tovs 7iai- 
8eias ogeyo^tevovs {MjSevos Liev aTteigas eyetv, 
navTayodev 8e Ta ygrjaifia ovXXeyeiv. MoXls 
ydg dv tls ex raim^s Trjs euL^ieXeias rots Trjs cpv- 
cecos dpagTias e7itxgaTr\6etev. 

5. Xenophon. Cyr. I. ii. 6. 

Ot 7tat8es tcov UegaSv, oi els tcc 8i8aaxaXela 
(potTcovTES, 8idyovoi pavOdvovxes Sixaioovviyv • 
xai Xeyovai, oxi eni tovto sq%ovtou, Soneg nag* 
r]^ilv oi xd ygdfifiaTa (.taQijoo^ievoi. Oi 8i dg- 
%ovtes avTav SiaTeXovai to nXelCTov Tjjs r/tiegas 
Sixd^ovTes avTols. TiyveTou ydg Si} xai natal 
ngos dXXtfXovs, Saiteg dvSgdoiv, eyxXY\{iaTa xai 
xXonrjs xai dgnayip, xai (3cas xai dndxijs xai 
xaxoXoytas xai aXXcov, oicov 8r] eixos. Ovs 8° 
dv yvcdoi tovtcov ti d8ixovvTas, T^icogovvTai. 



138 INTRODUCTION TO THE 

KaXd'CovdL di xal ovs av ddixm iyxalovvTas 
svgioxacii. 

6. Id. 
AixaXovoi di xal iyxXypaTOS, ov evsxa civ- 
OgcoTtot {.uoovoi fxiv dXXyjXovs paXiaTa, dtxd£ov- 
xat di {jxioja, ayagiCTias ' xal ov av yvcoai 
dvvdfjisvov fxiv ydgiv ditodidovai, ^uj dnodtdovTa 
di, xoXd^ovai xal tovtov toyvgas. Otovxai ydg 
tovs dyagiOTOvs xal rtsgl deovs av fidXioia 
dueXas iystv, xal negl yovkas xal naxgida xal 
cptXovs. zfiddaxovai Si tovs naidas xal ococpgo- 
dvvijv. 

7. 
To f.tiv ygvoiov iv tS nvgl fiadavifrfASv, tovs 
di cptXovs iv Tats aTvyiais diayiyvGJGxopsv. — 
Isocrates. 

/did tovto otfiai ijf.ias naidas ovxas tcc? tcov 
nonjTcov yvapas ixpavddvsiv, iv* dvdgss ovtss 
avxals ygcouzda. — JEschines. 

To ipov oapa, a Ttaldes, oTav TsXeviijaa, [iifos 
iv xgvciid OfjTS, {.irjTS iv dgyvgco {.ii\ts iv dXXcp 
{iijdsvl, dXXd Tjj 2'i} ®s id/iora duodois. Tc 
ydg tovtov [laxaguoTEgov tov yq Luydijvai, ij 
ndvTa idv Ta xaXd, ndvxa di t ay add (pvst ts 
xal Tgi(psi ; 'jEyco di xal dXXcos cpiXdvOgcouos 
iysvotnjv^ xal vvv fjdscos av iioc doxst xotvavi)- 
6ai tov zvtgyzTOvi'TOS dvdgconovs. — XenopnOfl, 



STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 139 

8. 

^ItfoxgdiTj? xaxicrtov ag%ovTa elsysv stvcu, tov 
dg%£iv iavzov fir} Svvdfxevov. 'EgcoTrjQels, did 
noiav ahiav tovs aXXovs Siddoxav Xkyuv^ avzos 
dtcoTta, ecpri • xal ydg y\ dxovrj avxiq [iiv ov t£- 
[ivei, id 8i %'icpri 6%sa nouL 3 J?gcoT?]d£is, tlvi oi 
cpiXoTtovoL tcov gaOvfjHov ScacpEgovcfiv ; slubv, cos 
ol svoefisis tcov dG£J3cov, iXntoiv dyadals. 'ISeov 
veaviav (piXoTiovovvxa, scpr} ■ xdXXiOTOv orpov tS 
yqgcLTi dgivsis. AdXov tivos a%oXd'CsLv nag" 
cci^tw (3ovXo{i£vov, diriovs fjirjCts fxiodovg • tov 
Si T}jv ahiav nvdo^isvov • "Eva [iiv (Jcprf)^ iva 
XaXsiv pddijs, tov 8i BTsgov, iva oiydv. 



VOCABULARY 



12 



VOCABULARY. 



dyaOog, rj, ov, good ; brave. 

dydnr\, ??s, ??, love. 

dyysXos, ov, 6, a messenger. 

dykwryxog, ov, 6, 7/, (yevvdco) unbegotten* 

™ Ayis, idos, 6, Agis. 

dyxvga, as, 77, an anchor. 

dyco, di-a, jj%a and dyrjo%a, yyfxai, Ear. Aor* 

i\yayov, to lead ; to drive ; dye, come on. 
dySv, avog, 6, a contest, a combat; a game. 
dycovifrfAou, oopou, rjyavLOfjiai, to contend, to 

fight for a prize. 
dSsXcpGs, ov, 6, a brother. 
aSrjs, ov, 6, Hades, the infernal world. 
ddixia, jjgco, ffdtxrjxa, (dixy) to do injustice, to 

injure. 
d8ixr][.ia, axog, to, an act of injustice, an offence. 
dSixia, as, jj, injustice, injury. 
dSixog, ov, 6, if, unjust. 
dSixag, unjustly. 

dSogia, as, rj, (<$o'Ja) want of reputation; dishonor, 
a&a, a 00, (contr. from as Id a) to sing. 



144 VOCABULARY. 

dsl and aki, always. 

dddvarog, ov, 6, 7), (ddvazog) immortal. 

ddscog, (Oeog) impiously; wickedly. 

'AOrjvai, cov, at, Athens. 

^ Adnvalog, a, ov, Athenian, 

dOXrjjrfs, ov, 6, (ddXog, a combat) a wrestler, a 

combatant in the games. 
'Adas, 00, 6, Athos, a mountain. 
Atyvmog, ov, 77, Egypt. 
AiyvTixiog, ov, 6, Egyptian. 
aidsoficu, ovpai, aidaooficu, j}8£6[jlou, y8iodrfv, (at- 

Sas) to respect, to reverence; to be ashamed. 
aldcog, ov?, 7), respect, reverence, decorum, mod- 
esty, shame. 
aixt'Co, Pass, opou, to treat with ignominy, to 

torture, to harass. 
algsrog, i\, ov, eligible ; preferable. 
cdgkco, 00, 7J600, fjgijxa, Ear. Jlor. stkov, to take, 

to seize ; Mid. aigioftai, ovfxai, stXofi^v, to 

take to one's self, to choose. 
alo/gog, d, ov, ugly ; base, disgraceful. 
alo%vvri, 77?, 7), shame, disgrace ; modesty. 
aicf%vvG), woo, j}<j%vyxa, to shame, Jtfid. alo%vvo- 

fiat, to be ashamed of; to reverence. 
alxsco, co, t\cco, jjzijxa, to ask. 
atria, a?, y, a cause. 
aicov, covos, 6, time, a space of time ; an age ; 

eternity. 
dxLvdxijg, ov, 6, a Persian sword, a scimetar. 
dxov7\, ijg, 7), a whetstone. 



VOCABULARY. 145 

dxovco, aytovaopai, dxrfxoa, to hear ; Per/. Pass. 

7}X0VG[A.0U. 

dxgoTtoXis, sas, ^, (dxgos, noXis) an upper tow- 
er, a citadel. 

dxTrj, jjs, r/, (ayvvfii, ciyco, to break) a broken, 
rocky shore, a shore. 

dXijSsia, as, ?), truth, 

dXtjdjjg, iog, ovg, 6, fy true. 

dX-qdag, truly. 

dXxrj, strength, vigor. 

dXXd, but. 

dXXvXcov, ovg, of each other; JYom. not used. 

d'XXog, n, o, another; ol dXXoi, the rest (ceteri). 

dXXcog, otherwise, in other respects. 

dXoyiaxog, ov, o, v], (a priv. and Xoyog) irration- 
al, inconsiderate. 

aAoK^f, sxog, iJl, a fox. 

dfiadjjs, iog, 6, ?J, (uavddva) unlearned, ignorant. 

dfiadia, as, 77, ignorance. 

d^iagxdvco, d^iagT^Ga, rjfidgTwxa, Ear. Aor. rjfiotg- 
tov, to err ; to miss ; to commit offence. 

d^aoita, as, 77, error, fault; sin. 

dpsXas, ((.tiXsi, curae est) negligently, careless- 
ly ; dueXag l%uv, to be neglectful. 

dpa\xcog, ogog, 6, iq, (pr(ing) motherless. 

d^nsXav, covog, 6, a vineyard. 

dv, employed with verbs, gives to them the idea of 
uncertainty and mere possibility ; thus, sXeyov, 
I was speaking, sXsyov dv, I would be speak- 
ing; fjXQov, I came, -qXdov dv, I would have 
12* 



146 VOCABULARY. 

come ; Xiyot^a, I might speak, Xkyoiiii dv, 1 

might perhaps speak. 
oi v, for idv or rjv, if, distinguished from the for- 
mer by beginning a clause, 
dvafiaivco, fitfoopou, ftsfinxa, Ear. Aor. dvefinv, 

(j3aivcd) to go up, to ascend. 
dvafiifidZco, doco, (/3t/3a£b, j3d£co, fiaivco, fidco) to 

cause to ascend. 
dvaytyvcooxco, yvaooLiai, syvcoxa, (yiyvaoxco) 

Ear. Aor. dviyvcov, to read. 
dvayxaios, a, ov, necessary, unavoidable. 
dvdyxij, i]9, 7], necessity. 
dva^, xzos, 6, a king, a prince. 
dveifAL, Inf. dvuvai, Part, dvicov, Imp erf. Past. 

dvrjziv, (dvd, sifxi, to go, see ^61) to go up, 

to ascend. 
dvefxos, ov, 6, wind. 
dvsv, with gen., without. 
dvEVQLGxcQ, gijoco, Aor. dvsvgov, (evgitixco) to find 

out, to discover. 
dvijg, dvdgos, 6, a man. 
dvdos, eog ovs, to, a flower. 
dvOgcoTzivos, n, ov, pertaining to man, human. 
dvOgconos, ov, 6, a human being, a man. 
dviagos, a, ov, {dvia, sadness, trouble) sad, 

troublesome. 
dvida, co, daco, to cause pain, to grieve (rivd) 

any one ; Mid. dvico^iai, to grieve. 
dvLoiijf.a, aujaco, iarrfxa, (loivlii) to set up, to 

raise up ; dvaoifp'ai, to rise. 



VOCABULARY. 147 

dvoSygofiou, Aor. Mid. dvadvgdfjiriv, (oSvgopai, 
odvgco) to wail aloud. 

avxiXkya, |», to speak against, to contradict. 

dvTiTZOLQOLGXBvd'CcD) doco, (oxsvd^o, oxsvos) to pre- 
pare against; Mid. to prepare one's self 
against. 

* AvTioQkvr\s, sos ovs, Antisthenes. 

dvxQov, ov, to, a cavern. 

dvaOev, from above ; upper. 

dj-ios, a, ov, worthy. 

dogdrog, ov, 6, 7], (ogdco, to see) invisible. 

dnayyilXa, sXco, TiyysXxa, (dyysXXco) to bear 
back word, to report. 

ditallayri, i^s, 7), a release, liberation. 

dnaXXaTTot), d^co, dnr(XXa^a, Ear. Aor. Pass, 
dmiXXdyriv, to liberate, to free ; Mid. ditaX- 
XdzxEodat, to depart. 

anas, aoa, av, all, every. 

dndzr), lis, 77, (dnaTaco, to deceive) deception, 
fraud, deceit. 

dndjcog, ogos, 6, 7), (jtajrig) without a father. 

djiEL^Li, Inf. dndvai, Part, dnicov, (ano, eifii, to 
go, see ^ 61) to go away, to depart. 

dnsigas (dnsigos, inexperienced, not having 
proved) %x uv dnatgcos twos, to be unac- 
quainted with any thing. 

dnkgxoyLai, iXevooftai, ifajkvda, Aor. d7Zrjh0ov 9 
(sg%o[iai) to go away, to depart. 

dno^dklw, (3aha, fiifiktixa, (fidkXa) to cast 
away, to loose. 



148 VOCABULARY. 

ditodiBgdaxco, Sgdaa, dsdgaxa, (Sgdu) Aor. dnk- 

dgdv, to run away (as a servant). 
aitodidcoui, daoco, SsSaxa, (Si8a(.u) to give back, 

to restore, to pay ; Mid. djzodiSofiai, to sell. 
dnodvyaxco, OavovfxaL, (dvijoxa) to die ; Jlor, 

dnidavov. 
dnoxzeLvco, sva, dnixzova, LaL Jlor. ditixzeiva, 

(xzelvco) to slay. 
dnoXunco, \pa, XiXoina and XeXsupa, Aor. eXinov, 

(Xeluco) to leave behind, to abandon. 
dnoXXvpi, (oXXv[ii) oXcj, aXsxa, Jlor. aXeaa, to 

destroy ; Mid. dnoXXvixcu, oXovpac, Aor. dno- 

Xo^v, to perish. So Ear. Per/. Act. dnoXco- 

Aa, I am undone, I perish. 
^noXXcov, avog, 6, Apollo. 
dnofiavOdvco (duo, fiavOdva) to unlearn. 
d7to6TsXXcd, eXa, diieozaXxa, Lat. Aor. dnkaxuXa, 

(aziXXa) to send forth, to send away. 
dnoocpdzzco, acpd^co, (ocpdzzco) to slaughter, to 

murder, to stab ; Mid. dnoacpdzzoiiai, to stab 

one's self. 
aTZOTvyydva, zev^ofxai, Ear. Aor. duezv/ov, (zvy- 

%dva) to fail of, not to obtain. 
ditocptvycd) (p8v^of.iai, djionecpsvya, Aor. dnicpv- 

yov, (duo, (pevyco) to flee away, to escape. 
dnzco, dipa, yep a, Jlor. r/ya, to fasten or appty 

one thing to another, hence to kindle, to set 

on fire, by bringing the torch in contact with 

the fire ; Mid. dnzopiou, to connect one's self 

with, to lay hold of, to cling to. 



VOCABULARY. 



149 



"Agyog, ovg, to, Argos, a city in Argolis. 

* Agyog, ov, 6, Argus. 

dgyvgog, ov, 6, silver. 

dgsoxco, dgioco, ijgsopou, rjgiddriv, to please.. 

dgeirj, rjg, rj) virtue. 

: Agiddvii, rig, i), Ariadne. 

AgioTimiog, ov, 6, Aristippus*. 

agiorog, rj, ov, best. 

^ Agi6ToxkXy\g, sog, 6, Aristotle. 

olgfxa, axog, to, a chariot. 

agfidisLos, a, ov, pertaining to a chariot. 

*Ag[iovia, as, ?i, Harmonia. 

dgnayrj^ ijg, r), (dgrttiXco) a seizure, robbery. 

dgg-qv, svog, 6, i), male. 

agrvco, voco, rjgzvxa, (ago, to join, to fit) to join, 

to put together, to prepare. 
dg%rj, ijg, yj, a beginning, a taking the lead, a 

government. 
agxa, |«, r^g/a, to begin, to take the lead of, to 

govern ; Mid. dg^ofxai, to begin (for one's 

self). 
6ig%cov, ovjog, 6, a ruler, a magistrate. 
dasfiijg, sog, 6, tj, (ozfia) impious. 
doOsvico, co, rjaco, rJGdsvrjxa, (adivog, strength) 

to be weak, to be sick. 
dadsvrjg, eg, iog, 6, r), weak, infirm, sick. Comp. 

doOevsojegog. 
daxsa, co, ?jaco, ijaxrixa, to exercise, to train, to 

practise. 
doTtjg, sgog, 6, a star. 



150 VOCABULARY. 

daxv, sos, to, a city. 

^Aazvay-qs, sos, 6, Astyages. 

dacpaXijs, sos, 6, ?), (alalia) safe, secure* 

^Aigdhjs, ov, 6, Atrides, son of Atreus. 

dzv%ia. a?, ^, (rvyrj) misfortune. 

avzos, jj, 6, self (ipse) ; with the article, the 

same ; in the oblique cases alone, him, her, it ; 

see § 21 ; tolvtol, these things ; ravid (id 

avid), the same things. 
dcpavijs, ios, 6, tj, (cpacvco) not conspicuous, 

obscure, invisible. 
d(fioTr\iii, duoaTijaco, dpiazyxa, Aor. dnkaxiiv, to 

remove, to cause to withdraw ; Mid. dfpioxa- 

pou, to withdraw, to cease from. 
'AcpgoSix-n, r/s, y, Venus. 

dipgoovvy], ys, 7j, (dcpgav) folly, want of sense. 
acpgcov, ovos, ((pQi\v) senseless, foolish. 
d(pcovog, ov, 6, ?j, (cpavij) without voice, dumb, 

speechless. 
d%aQL6Tia, as, i], (%dgis) ingratitude. 
d%dgioios, ov, 6, rj, ungrateful. 
a/do^ac, scoriae, (ayQos, dyco) to be burdened, 

to grieve, to be disgusted. 

B. 

jiadvs, sta, v, deep. 

fidXka, fiaXrx), /3i/3A?pa, Aor. sfiaXov, to cast, to 

throw, to shoot. 
fiagvs, sia, v, heavy, oppressive. 
fidgos, eos, to, a weight, a burden. 



VOCABULARY. 151 

fiagvvu, vva, fiefidgvyxa, (fiagvs) to burden, to 
weigh down, to oppress ; Mid. fiagvvopai, to 
become heavy. 

f}aaavt£a>, lao, (fidaavos, a touchstone) to try 
by applying to a touchstone, to try, to prove. 

fiaoiXeia, as, i\, a reign, a kingdom. 

fiaoiXuov, ov, to, and fiariXsia, ov, rd, a royal 
abode, a palace. 

fiaoiXsvs, ass, 6, a king. 

fisfiaios, ov, 6, ifa and os, a, ov, firm, sure, per- 
manent. 

(SsXos, sos, to, ((3dXXo), a missile weapon. 

fieXriav, ovos, 6, ??, (dyadds) better; fiaXTiGtos, 
best. 

flia, as, i\, force, violence. 

fitos, ov, 6, life, a livelihood. 

fiXafisgos, a, ov, (fiXa^y, fiXaTtzco,) injurious. 

fiXdma, yja, fisfiXacpa, to injure. 

(3Xdozr][.ia, atos, to, (ftXaozdvco) a bud, shoot, 
flower. 

fiXsTtco, yja, fisfiXeya, to look at, to see, to behold. 

Botox ia, as, rj, Bceotia. 

fioxgvs, vos, 6, a cluster of grapes. 

fioyXopat, fiovXijaopai, fiefiovXrjpai, to will, to 
choose. 

fiovs, fioos, 6, tf, an ox, a cow, a bull. 

figaSsas, (figadvs, slow) slowly. 

figa%vs, sia, v, short, brief. 

figovxij, ijs, r\, thunder. 

P&pos, ov, 6, an altar. 



152 VOCABULARF. 

r. 

ydg, for. 

yacmjg, egos, 7), a belly, stomach. 

yi gives emphasis and distinctness to the word 
ivith which it is connected, certainly, particu- 
larly, at least. 

ysXdco, co, doco, ysyiXaxa, to laugh. 

ysvszi], TJg, 71, (yivog) birth. 

ysvvaiog, a, ov, noble, excellent. 

ysvvatcog, nobly ; courageously. 

ysvvdco, co, r\oco, yeyivvtixa, to beget, to produce. 

yivog, sog, ovg, to, a race, descent, kind. 

yicpvga, as, 7), a bridge. 

yi\, yrjg, 7), the earth ; a land. 

yr\ko(pog, ov, 6, (yrj, Xocpog, a hill) a rising ground, 
a hill. 

yrjgag, axog, to, old age. 

ytyvofiai, (yivco obs.) ysvijaofiaL, ykyova, Pass. 
yeyevTipou, Ear. Aor. Mid. iysvoprjv, to be- 
come, to happen. 

yiyvcooxco, yvcooofiai, eyvcoxa, Aor. syvcov, to know. 

yXvxvg, eia, v, sweet, Comp. yXvxicov. 

ylcoGoa, 77s, i\, the tongue.. 

yvcopii, 7ig, 7), (yvoco, id. qu. yiyvcodxco) senti- 
ment, opinion, judgment. 

yovevg, sag, 6, (yevco, yiyvopai) a generator, a 
father ; ol yovsig, parents. 

ygcua, as, 7), (ytgaiog) an old woman. 

ygdp^ia, axog, to, (ygdcpco) any thing written, 



VOCABULARY. 1 53 

writing ; PL to, ygd^aia^ letters, literature, 

the elements of knowledge. 
ygdya, vjco, ysygacpa, to write, to paint. 
rgvllos, ov, 6, Gryllus. 
yvvrj, yvvaixos, r\, a woman. 

J. 

8aiu.av, ovos, 6, a divinity, daemon* 

8dxva, (8ax, 8nx) Sr^o^ai, 8i8n%a, s8axov, Pass. 

Sidijyiiai, to bite. 
8dxgvov, ov, to, a tear. 
Saxgvco, vaco, to shed tears, to weep. 
ddpafas, scos, r\, a heifer. 
davaos, ov, 6, Danaus. 

Javaoi, ov, ot, descendants of Danaus, Grecians. 
8s, a particle of connection, whether copulative or 

disjunctive ; an d > b u t. 
8sl, Subj. Ssy, Opt. 8soi, Inf. 8stv, Part. 8sov, 

Fut. dsrfcsi, it is necessary. 
8si8o, 8sioofiai, 8£8ia and Ssdocxa, to fear, Perf 

8s8oixa, I fear. 
8slxvv(al, 8si^co, Perf. Pass. 8i8siy{iai, to show. 
8siX6s, r\, ov, (8si8a, to fear) cowardly, timid. 
8sivos, r\, ov, (8sos, fear) fearful, dreadful ; 

hence applied to any thing which inspires strong 

feeling, as mighty, powerful, grievous, strange; 

as, 8siv6s Xsysiv, mighty to speak ; 8sivos igsv- 

gstv nogovs, skilful to find out expedients. 

Comp. 8sLvorsgos, Sup. 8stv6jaios. 
8sxa, ten. 

13 



154 VOCABULARY. 

Ssxami^vs, v, (dsxa, 7tfj%vs) ten cubits long. 

dsg^ia, arog, to, a skin, a hide. 

deopcjTiJQLOv, ov, to, (dea^iog, a bond, 8ico, to 
bind) a prison. 

SsctTioT?]?, ov, b, a master, a lord. 

de^o^ai, digopou, osdsyfiou, to receive. 

8ij (contr. from ijdjj), at this moment, already, 
at once ; hence introduced constantly to give 
liveliness and vigor to discourse; answers to 
our you see, indeed, fyc. 

dijfiooOivijs, so?, ovg, Demosthenes. 

Siafiaivco, (Sjjaofiat, fisp?ixa 9 ddfiiiv, (fiaiva) to 
go through, to cross over. 

SiayiyvcoaxcD, yvaxjopat, syvcoxa, (yiyvactxco) to 
distinguish. 

bidyo, |«, to lead through, to lead across ; with 
ellipsis of xqovov, to spend one's time, to 
continue. 

diaycoviZopaL, lao^iai, dniyavicificu, to keep con- 
tending. 

dLadtdofu, Satico, dedcoxa, (3idco[.u) to distribute. 

didkvGLs, sag, i), (Xvco, to loose) separation, dis- 
solution. 

diaXvcD, aco, dialslvxa, (Xvco) to dissolve. 

diagiivG), a, diapsfisvTjxa, (fxiva) to remain, to 
stay, to continue. 

diavipa, a, dcavevs^ajxa, to share, to allot, to 
distribute. 

Siatixditjco, vjco, (dxaitTCd) to dig through, un- 
dermine. 



VOCABULARY. 155 

SiaTdtfciG), |«, 8iaTSTa%a, (xdaaco) to dispose, to 
arrange, to regulate. 

Siarslsco, 6, idco, diaTSisksxa, (isXico) to accom- 
plish, to continue, or spend one's time ; 8ia- 
reksL pavddvcdv, he spends his time learning. 

8iaTgi(3cd, yjco, Siarezgifa, Per/. Pass. Tszgifi- 
fiou, (rgifia) to wear away, to consume, to 
spend time. 

8iacpigo, oitico, Aor. 8ijjvsyxa, (cpsgco) to differ, 
to surpass. 

8iacpvXdTTco, %co, ((fvXduco, (pvXa^ a guard) to 
continue guarding, to preserve. 

8i8aoxaletov, ov, to, a place of instruction, a 
school. 

8t8daxaKo? i ov, 6, a teacher. 

8i8doxa>, 8i8d%eo, 8s8[8a%a, 8e8t8a/fia^ to teach. 

8180^1, 8acico, 8i8coxa, to give. 

Sieg/opou, iXsvaofiat, ifajXvda, Aor. 8ifjX0ov, to 
go through. 

8ixd£a, acta, (81x11, justice) to judge, to adminis- 
ter justice, to pronounce sentence ; Mid. 81- 
xd£opou, to conduct a suit. 

8txaios, cc, oi/, just. 

8ixaio<jvv?f, ?/s, ji, justice. 

8txaicjg, justly. 

SixatiTris, ot/, 6, a judge. 

dixy, ij?, i], justice, a suit at law. 

Jioyivqs, eog, 6, Diogenes. 

8ioLxico, to, tfcfco, 8icpx7ixa, (olxos) to regulate 
household affairs, to dispose, to administer. 



156 VOCABULARY. 

Stogvaaco, £co, 8uogv%a, (ogvodco) to dig through. 

8ts, twice. 

8ltt6s, i\, ov, and 8iaa6s, double. 

8icpgos, ov, 6, (8 is and cpsgco, dicpogos, bearing- 
two) a charioteer's seat. 

8lvjos, sos, to, (8tvja) thirst. 

8t6xco, £co, 8s8ico/a, to pursue. 

Sficoij, ijs, i\, a maid- servant. 

8oxsco, co, 86%co, Perf. Pass. SeSoypai, to think, 
to seem ; 8oxsc, it seems good ; dedoxrou, it 
is resolved upon. 

86£a, ijs, i\, an opinion, estimation, reputation, 
glory. 

8ovXos, ov, 6, a slave, a subject of despotic power. 

dvvapou, 8vvij<jo^ai, dsdvvrtfiou, e8vvijQijv, to be 
able ; Part. 8vvd[isvos. 

8vvadxua, as, ij, (dvyaficu) power, official au- 
thority, sway. 

8vo and 8vco, two. 

dvopai, SvdQfidij iSvad^v, (8vg>, to submerge) 
to go under, to set ; as the sun, from his be- 
ing supposed to sink in the ocean. 

dvc>zv%sed, to, i]aoo, (8vs and tv%v, fortune) to be 
unfortunate. 

8v<jTv%ia, as, 1), misfortune. 

8oogov, ov, to', (86co, 8i8ca^u) a gift. 

lav, icith Subj. if. 

iavTov, i}s, ov, of himself, herself, fyc. 



VOCABULARY. 157 

lyyvs, with Gen. near. 

iyxakia, S, iao, lyxkxhixa, (xakico) to accuse, 
to inculpate. 

zyxfajfia, arog, to, a charge, an accusation. 

iyco, ifiov or fiov, I. 

si, if, with Ind. and Opt. 

si'da (obs.), Ear. Aor. siSov, to see. See ogdo. 

sidaXov, (sldos, a form) an image, a picture. 

sldcos, knowing, Per/. Part, from olda, quod vide. 

stxco, to be like, to resemble, to seem ; soixa, it 
seems, it resembles. 

slxos, o'tos, to', that which is like, that which is 
probable, natural. 

slxeiv, ovog, ?), an image. 

stfii, to be. See § 65. 

stfii, Inf. livat, Part, lav, (see § 65) to go. 

slitov, I spoke, I said, Ear. Jlor.from sua (ohs.). 

slgi^isvos, ?/, ov, Pass. Pai*t. of gia>. 

slgrjvji, ris, ?], peace. 

sis, iiia, sv, one. 

siosXavvco, slasXd^co, SLtisXrftaxa, (ikavvoo) to 
drive into, to ride or march into. 

si<jsg%o[xou, ilsvaofxai, iXij?,vda, Ear. Aor. slaijk- 
Gov, to come into. 

sxaoios, ?i, ov, each, every one. 

sxarov, a hundred. 

ixdsiga, sgco, ixdidagxa, (digco) to flay, to skin. 

sxslvos, y\, o, he, that person. 

ixxXyoia, as, r), (xaksco, to call) a popular as- 
sembly. 

13* 



158 VOCABULARY. 

ixnXico, svgco, nkn'ksvxa, (ix, tcXsco) to sail out, 

to sail away. 
sxTtoisoo, co, ijoco, 7is7ioi7jxci, to complete, to make, 

to deliver. 
ixros, outside, without. 
sxcov, ovaa, 6v, willing, voluntary. 
iXdrrav, ovos, 6, ?), less, smaller. 
iXavvoo, iXdoco, Att. iXco, iXijXaxa, iXijXaficu, r\Xd- 

di\v, to drive ; elliptically, to advance, to march. 
iXdyiaros, r\, ov, Sup. of i karroo v, least, smallest. 
iXssco, co, ijoco, (JXsos, pity) to pity, to compas- 
sionate. 
eXsn^xoavvij, ijs, tj, pity, alms. 
iXsvdegog, a, cv, free. 

c EXixcov, oovos, 6, Helicon, a mountain in Bozotia. 
c EXXds, ddog, 77, Greece. 
a EXXr ( v, ijvog, 6, a Grecian. 
Q EXXi\6novrog, ov, 6, the Hellespont. 
sXXimjg, sos, 6, ?/, (XeL7tco, to leave) deficient. 
IXniXco, loco, jjXmxa, to hope, to expect. 
ikinis, tdos, y, hope, expectation. 
iufidXXoo, fiaXoi, fiifihjxa, Aor. ivifiaXov, (/3aA- 

Xoo) to throw or cast in ; clUpticalhj, to empty 

or discharge itself, as a river, 
ififxsvco, svoo, i^f.isidvijxa, ((asvcd) to remain in, 

to endure, to continue. 
ifxog, ?/, 6v, my, mine. 
ip7Zi7tzoo, Tteaovfiai, ip.7tS7trooxa f Aor. wires Gov, 

(jtlnrco) (o fall in or among. 
ifutXijOco, i\gco, {nXi\dco) to be full, to be satisfied. 



VOCABULARY. 159 

ifKpsgco, ivoitico, ((piga) to bring in. 

ivdsopai, ivdsiodou, to want, to need, with Gen. 

ivdva, 8vaa, ivSidvxa, to enter in, to put on ; 

Mid. evdvoiiai, to put upon one's self. 
i'vsxa, on account of, with Gen. 
ivvka, nine. 
ivxavda, here. 

ivzoXrf, ijs, -q, (ivzilXco, to command) a com- 
mand, a charge. 
igcugsa, «, foco, qxa, Aor. l|aAov, (algeco) to 

take out, to take away forcibly ; Mid. i§ai~ 

govfiai, to select, to take out. 
E^aXucpco, ipa, Per/. Pass. i^aXyjlifx^ai, to wipe 

out, to efface, to obliterate (aksccpco). 
il;sgxouai, i^slsvoofxai, it-shjXvda, Jlor. i^rjhdov, 

{egxo^ai) to come out. 
l|£Tct£b, doco, to examine, to try. 
ETtcuvECQ, 6, toco, (aivos) to praise. 
3 E7tafuv6)v8as, ov, 6, Epaminondas. 
east, since, when, after. 

inetSdv, (iitsidrj and av) with Subj. when, after. 
ijieidrf, since, after, when. 

STteira, (sTti, sfca) then, afterwards, Lat. deinde. 
imygdipco, xpco, yeygafa, (ygdcpco) to write upon, 

to inscribe. 
inidvyiia, ag, ?/, (Qvpos) desire. 
iuLxgaTico, 6 } tjGco, xsxgdnjxa, (xgaros, force) 

to conquer, to overcome. 
imfiilsia, as, ?), (Jill, ^ieXbl, curae est) care. 
BTtia^ao?, 6, ??, (arjfia) distinguished. 



160 VOCABULARY. 

i7ii(jxoT8co, co, ijoco, (oxotos, darkness) to darken, 

to obscure. 
InLOTCLiiai, Imp, Part. lniOTap\v, Fut. ItxiottiOo- 

liui, to know. 
sTtLOTij^, ijs, i\, (iftidxapcu) application, study, 

knowledge. 
ijtLOTohj, ijs, ij, (Itcl, oriXlco, to send) an epistle. 
inin^dsvco, svoco, to be employed with, to pur- 
sue, to practise. 
inicpEQCd, oloco, ivi']vo%a, evi)vsyLiai, Aor. Act. 

ijvsyxa, (<psgco) to bring to, to bring upon, or 

against ; Mid. i7Ucpigo{.icu, to bear one's self 

upon, to rush upon. 
ima, seven. 
igyd^ofiai, doopuu, si'gyaOiiou, (egyov, a work) to 

work, to labor, to perform. 
igyaola, as, ?), a working, labor, an occupation. 
egydxijs, ov, 6, a laborer, a workman, a performer. 
egyov, ov, to, a work, labor, deed, business. 
igsco, co, (see geco) to say. 
egi'Cco, loco, (egis, strife) to strive, to contend. 
c JEgfJLrjs, ov, 6, Mercury. 
igv^vos, ?/, ov, fortified. 
lg%oiiai, ilsvooLiai, ihjlvOa, Aor. i\kQov, to 

come. 
igcoicico, co, ijoco, TjgcoTijxa, to interrogate, to ask. 
is for els, into, to. 
ioOijs, ijxos, i], (ioQzco, to clothe, from svvvlil, to 

put on) clothing. 
IoOlco (tdco), Fut. sSollcu, idijdoxa, iSrjdsOfiai, 

ridioO^v, to eat. 



VOCABULARY. 161 

bote and itfr' civ, until. 

Ejsgos, a, ov, the other of two. 

hi, still, even now, further. 

hoLfiog, t\, ov, ready, prepared. 

ev, well. 

EvyivEia, as, ?), (fv, yevos) high birth, nobility. 

svyEVTJs, eos, 6, 7), well-born, noble. 

svdoupovecQ, co, ijaco, (wdaipav) to be happy. 

svdaifiovta, as, ?/, happiness, prosperity. 

ev8aifji(ov 9 ovos, 6, tj, (ev, daiptav) happy, pros- 
perous. 

svEgysjeco, S, r\oco, (ev, Egyov) to benefit, to do 
good to. 

svxlEta, as, 7), (xkios) renown, glory. 

J2vx?>£i8}]9, ov, 6, Euclid. 

evXapEOfiai, ovfiai, jjoofiai, to beware of, to 
shun, to be on one's guard. 

evvov/os, ov, 6, (evvrj, E/coi) a eunuch. 

Evginlhjs, ov, 6, Euripides. 

evgioxo, Evgrjaco, Evgrixa, Jlor. Efigov, to find ; to 
invent. 

Evgvs, Eta, v, wide, broad. 

EvaE^Eta, as, 7), (EvaE^r\s) piety. 

evce^ijs, eos, 6, 7), (ev, oe[3g)) pious. 

EVTV%E6T£gOS, Comp. of £VTV^7(S. 

£vtv%ecj, S, riaco, (ev, Tv%rj) to be fortunate. 
Evzvxtfg, eos, 6, i), fortunate, prosperous. 
svrv%ta, as, 7), good fortune, prosperity. 
£v%o{xai, evfjopai, Evypai, to pray, to supplicate, 
to desire. 



162 VOCABULARY. 

avcpogog, 6, ij, (sv, cpsga) fruitful. 

ayyfiog, ov, 6, a grown young man. 

icpLCTijLu, EiziGTifoa, icpiaiqxa, to place on or by ; 

i7i£(jT7}v, I stood near. 
i%dgog, a, oV, hostile ; i^dgog, ov, 6, an enemy. 
€%co, f|o or a%ii<ja, so%i]xa, JLor. £<y%ov, to have. 
sag, until. 

Z. 

tdco, 6, Cdfec), Sijaofiai, etyxa, rare) to live ; ol 

tavrsg, the living. 
£svyvv[ju 9 £W|«, E&v%a 9 (Zevya, obs.) to yoke, to 

harness, to join. 
Zsvg, Jiog and Zr\v6g, Jupiter. 
typta, as, ?), loss, punishment. 
Zijvcov, avog, 6, Zeno. 
Syria, 6, jjacD, iZrjiyxa, to seek. 
fyfajcag, sag, ?j, seeking, search, asking. 
Zmj, qg, ?), (fao, to live) life. 
£6ov, ov, to, a living creature, an animal. 

ijyspav, 6vog, 6, a leader, a conductor, a guide. 

ijyeopaL, ovficu, jjaofiai, ijyij^aL, («!/») to lead, 
conduct, guide ; to think. 

ij8£iv, (from oida) I knew. 

Tjdecdg, with pleasure, willingly. 

ijhj, at this moment, at once, immediately, al- 
ready ; moreover, even. 

r/dovij, ijg, q, pleasure. 



VOCABULARY. 163 

rjSvs, sta, if, sweet, pleasant. 
{jxiGTa, least, in the least degree. 
tjxco, ?/Ja, to come ; Pres. I am come. 
rjkidtos, a, or, stupid, foolish. 
rifaxiaTrjs, ov, 6, one of the same age, a con- 
temporary, a mate. 
r)Mxos, q, ov, what sort of, how large. 
fjfaos, ov, 6, the sun. 
yjixega, as, tj, a day. 
a Hga, as, r\, Juno. 
c HgaxXirjs, iovs, 6, Hercules. 
tJttcov, ovos, 6, i), less, inferior; JYeut. tjttov. 
c 'H(pai6Tos, ov, 6, Vulcan. 
r)%G), 60s ovs, i\, echo. 

0. 

ddXaaaa, y\s, r}, the sea. 

Sdvaios, ov, b, (dvyjaxo) death* 

ddiiTco, \pa, Tsdapfiai, to bury. 

OavfAactTos, rj, ov, (Oavpa, a wonder) wonderful,, 
admirable. 

Qiajxa, aros, to, (fecco^cu, to survey) a specta- 
cle, a sight, 

detos, a, ov, divine. 

OsXa, rjtfco, Aor. 7]QkXri6a, to will, to wish, to 
choose. 

6 sos, ov, 6, a god. 

OsQUfpos, ov, 6, {Qsgt'Cco, to reap) a harvest 

drigevco, aa, (dyjga, a hunt) to hunt, to pursue. 

Oiigiov, ov, to, (Orjg) a wild beast. 



164 VOCABULARY. 

Onaavgos, ov, 6, a treasure. 

Bqaevs, ems, o, Theseus. 

Ovijoxcj, Oavov(.icu, jiOvjjxa, Jlor. sdavov, to die. 

Ovijtos, ij, ov, mortal. 

06gv(3os, ov, 6, a tumult, disturbance. 

dvydxiig, egos, ?), a daughter. 

dv^a, oltos, to, incense, an offering, a sacrifice. 

Ovfios, ov, 6, passion, anger ; desire. 

Ovga, as, i\, a door. 

/. 

i'Sios, a, ov, one's own, peculiar, private. 

hgov, ov, to, (JYeat. of lego?) any thing conse- 
crated ; a temple. 

txavos, ij, ov, adequate, sufficient, fit, consid- 
erable. 

iva, in order that. 

Ivayos, ov, 6, Inachus. 

los, ov, 6, poison. 

iTtTios, ov, 6, a horse. 

3 Iaoxgdnis, sos, 6, Isocrates. 

°IagarjX, (indeclinable) Israel. 

I'dnifu, OTjjocD, to place ; saTiida, I placed ; Ear. 
Jlor. Eouiv, I stood ; Perf. eOTiixa, I stand ; 
Mid. LGzafiai, to place one's self, to stand. 

ic%vgos, d, ov, (i6%vs) strong. 

i6/vq(5s, powerfully, strenuously, severely. 

l<jyvs, vos, ii, strength. 

'Izakixos, i\, ov, Italian. 

i%Ovs, vos, 6, a fish. 



VOCABULARY. 165 



K. 



KaSpos, ov, 6, Cadmus. 

xaOffficu, Imp. Past ixadjfarjv, (t^wcu) to sit. 

xadi'Cdvco, (xaQi'Cco, i£&, ados, a seat) to sit. 

xai, and, also ; even. 

xuigos, ov, 6, a season. 

xatco, xavoco, Jlor. hxavaa, lxr\a, to kindle, to 

set on fire ; Mid. xauadai, to burn. 
xaxta, as, ij, vice, evil, cowardice. 
xaxoloyia, as, y\, (xaxov, Xsya) evil speaking, 

slander. 
xaxov, ov, to, an evil, evil. 
xaxos, ij, ov, evil, vicious, wicked, cowardly ; 

Comp. xaxicov, Sup. xdxiaxos. 
xaxcos, badly, illy, evilly. 
xaXico, S, eaco, xkxliyxa, xixXr^iai, to call. 
xaXos, i\, ov, beautiful, noble, honorable ; Comp. 

xaXXicov, Sup. xaXXidios. 
xaloxayaQla, as, i\, nobleness, virtue, upright- 
ness. 
xalcos, beautifully, well, honorably. 
xd^ivo, xafAco, xixfx^xa, Jlor. exafiov, to labor, to 

be in distress. 
xdv^ for xai dv, even if. 
xagSia, as, 7j, a heart, 
xagitos, ov, b, fruit. 
xaxaftaivtd, ftjjcioftai, fiefirjxa) xazifiTfv, (ftaivco) 

to go down, to descend. 
xajaxXivo, tvS, (xXiva) to bend down, to recline. 
14 



166 VOCABULARY. 

xaia}.Si7to, ipco, xazaksksKpa, (xard, Xsiitco) to 

leave behind, to forsake. 
xaTa7ioX£[AscQ, a, ijaco, (noks^sco) to subdue in war. 
xaraTlOiftM, xaradrfdco, ridscxa, (rid^fii) to lay 

down, to deposite. 
xaracpgovsco, a, ?fcco, ((pgoveco) to contemn, to 

despise. 
xaTayvyyj, fjs, ?), (xarafpsvyw, to flee for refuge) 

a refuge. 
xaTELSa, (xard, si'Sa) to look down, to survey, 

to behold. 
Tcaiy/ogecd, S, tjaco, xax-qyog^xa, (dyogtvco) to 

accuse. 
xandcov, Ear. Aor. Part, from xaxeldco. 
xdromgov, ov, to, a mirror. 
xsiprffaov, ov, to, (xalpou, to lie) a burden. 
KsXatvai, 6v, at, Celaenae. 
xsXevcQ) svaco, xexiXsvxa, to command. 
xegas, aros, to, a horn. 
xsgdos, eos, to', gain. 
xscpaXri, ijs, ?/, a head. 
xijgv£, vxos, 6, a herald. 
Kidougav, covos, 6, Cithaeron. 
xtvdvvos, ov, 6, danger. 
KXiag%os, ot/, 6, Ciearchus. 
xlzivos, ij, oV, (xlsos, renown) renowned, cele- 
brated. 
xkeos, ovs, to, renown, glory. 
xksTtirjs, ov, 6, (xXsjtTco) a thief. 
xXo7trf, ijs, i\, theft. 



VOCABULARY. 167 

xoivos, rj; ov, common. 

xocvavico, 6, tftico, xexoivavTixa, to partake, to 
share in. 

xoXd'Co, acta, xsxoXaxa, to chastise, to correct, 
to punish. 

xoXaxeta, a9, 7), flattery. 

x6Xa%, axog, 6, a flatterer. 

xo^iti, 7)9, 7j, hair. 

x6ga£, axos, 6, a raven, a crow. 

xogrf, 779, t), a maiden. 

xoa^ico, 6, TJcfco, x£XQG{Ly)xa, to arrange, to adorn. 

xodfxos, ov, 6, order, harmony, ornament ; the 
orderly system of things, the world. 

xgaTsco, a, 7Jaco, xsxgdzTixa, (xgdios) to rule, to 
command, to overcome. 

xgdios, eog, to, power, force, strength. 

xgeixxcov, superior, stronger, better ; Sup. xgd- 
tiotos, strongest, best. 

xgspdvvvfit, xgsfidtia, (xgepdco) to suspend, to 
hang up. 

xgidL9, sag, 7), (xglvco, to judge) the act of judg- 
ing, judgment, a decision, a sentence. 

Kgircov, covos, 6, Crito. 

xgoxodsikog, ov, 6, a crocodile. 

Kgovog, ov, 6, Saturn. 

xgvujco, yjco, Perf. Pass, xixgvfifiac, ixgycpd-qv, 
Jlor. sxgvfiov, to hide. 

xidofiou, Sfiat, xiTJaopcu, to acquire ; Perf. xk- 
xrr][Aai, I possess. 

xTTJpa, aro9, to, (xvdo[j,ou, to acquire) a posses- 
sion. 



168 VOCABULARY. 

xjrjctis, sco9, 7), the act of possessing, possession. 

Hilarys, ov, 6, (xtl^o) a builder, a founder. 

xv/.t%, 1x09, 71, a cup. 

xvfia, azos, to, a wave. 

xvqios, ov, 6, a lord, a master. 

Kvgo9, ov, 6, Cyrus. 

xvcov, xvvos, 6, 71, a dog. 

y.apii, 719, 1), a village. 

y.cocpo9, ?], oV, deaf, dumb. 

A. 

yiax£daif.iovco9, ov, a Lacedemonian. 

XaXeo), a, 7] a co, to talk, to speak. 

kd?.09, ov, 6, 71, talkative, loquacious. 

lapfidvco, fa'iyjoficu, uhiya, dXii^ai, ifajcpOiiv, 
Aor. Act. ekafiov, to take, to receive. 

?.a(.i7td9, ddo9, ij, a torch. 

},afi7igo9, d, ov, (Xd^7tco > to shine) splendid, bril- 
liant. 

kavddvco, fajtfa, Xihida, Xihi&fiai, (root kddco, 
hjdco) to be concealed, to escape notice ; Xav- 
Odvco ds tovto noiav, I escape your notice do- 
ing this, i. e. I do this without your knowledge. 

)Jouva, 119, 7), a lioness. 

Xeyco, Xt%co, Per/. Pass. Xsleypcu, iks%0iiv, to 
speak, to say. 

Xufia, rpco, to pour, to distil ; Mid. ksifiopm, to 
flow, to trickle. 

Xbltzo, yjco, XiXouta, Lett. Per/. XiXeicpa, to leave. 

Atovalo9, a, ov, Lerna^an. 



VOCABULARY. 169 

Xsvxos, ty oV, white. 

Xecov, ovtos, 6, a lion. 

Xrfya, |«, to stop, to cease. 

krfOrj, ?/s, fy forgetfulness. Arfiyi, Lethe, the 
river of oblivion in Hades. 

XiOos, ov, 6, a stone. 

Xiftrfv, svos, 6, a harbour. 

Aivos, ov, Linus. 

koyi&fiou, [(jofxai, (loyos) to reckon, to esti- 
mate, to consider. 

Xoyos, of, 6, (Xeya) speech, reason, an account. 

Xoutos tf, oV, (X£L7tco, to leave) what is left, rest, 
remaining ; rd lontd, the remaining things, the 
rest; tov Xoltzov (sc. %qovqv), for the future. 

Xovco, Xovdco, Perf. Pass. XiXov^iai, to wash (par- 
ticularly the body ; to wash the hands, vinT®* 
to wash clothes, itkvvto) ; Mid. Xovopai or 
Xov^iai, to wash one's self. 

A0990S, ov, 6, a summit, a hill. 

Avxcos, ov, 6, Lycius. 

Xvxog, ov, 6, a wolf. 

Avxovgyos, ov, 6, Lycurgus. 

XvitEG), i\(jco, XsXvjzifsta, {IvTtij), to grieve, to af- 
flict; Mid. Xv7tetadai, to grieve, to be dis- 
tressed. 

Xv7Z7], 77s, ?}, grief, pain. 

Xv%vos, ov, 6, a lamp. 

M. 

[id£a, ??s, f(, barley bread, a cake. 
14* 



170 VOCABULARY. 

[idOii^a, aros, to, (fiavOdvco, to learn) any thing- 
learned, knowledge, learning. 

^dQi\ois, ecos, i\, the act of learning, learning, 
instruction. 

fiaOrjTijs, ov, 6, a learner, a scholar. 

Mala, as, r\, Maia. 

Malavdgos, ov, 6, Maeander, a river in Asia Minor, 

[la'cvco, pava, ps^iiva, to madden; Mid. [xatvo- 
fiat, to be phrensied, to rave. 

pdxag, agog, 6, r), happy, blest, 

liaxdgios, a, ov, happy. 

Max&dovia, as, r), Macedonia. 

[tangos, d, ov, long. 

(.idXa, very much ; pdkXov, more. 

fxdXtara, most, especially, in the highest degree. 

3Iavddvii, lis, ij, Mandane. 

fxavddvco, {.laOrJGopai, [xepddiixa, Aor. spadov, to 
learn, to understand. 

pavia, a?, rj, madness. 

Mavzivua, as, ii, Mantinea. 

Magdvas, ov, 6, Marsyas. 

padziyoco, chjcq, (fxdciTij;, a whip) to whip, scourge. 

pd%n, ijs, i}, a fight, a battle. 

[id%o[iai, [.ia%soo{jiai and [ia%ovfiai, [tsf.id%r}{iai, 
to fight. 

pkyas, {.isydhi, fisya, great; Comp. (.isiZav, great- 
er ; >S'/^. [dyiGios, greatest. 

\ikya, JYeut. used adverbially, greatly. 

(jLtyzQos, eog, to, greatness. 

fxi0)i, lis, i), drunkenness. 



VOCABULARY. 171 

pslZcov, ovos, 6, tj, greater. See {iiy as. 

[Asigdxiov, ov, to, a young man, a boy. 

[xiXas, aiva piXav, black. 

ps Xiir], rjs, r/, (^sXsjdco, to exercise) a practis- 
ing, training, care. 

pi fa, ixos, to, honey. 

[lifaaaa and (lifaxra, qs, tj, a bee. 

[xsXXa, ixslXjjaco, to be about to do, to delay ; to 
{liXXov, id [liXXovia, that which is about to 
be, the future. 

fxificpofiat, fjL£[A,ipo[A6u, to blame, to censure. 

(xiv, a particle corresponding to our indeed, to 
be sure, in constructions like the following ; 
xanjyogsl fisv iftov, xgcvsi di tovtov, he ac- 
cuses indeed me, but places this man on tri- 
al ; dyados fxiv, 8vciTv%qs di, good to be sure, 
but unfortunate. // is generally used with di, 
and indicates a contrast frequently too slight 
to be expressed in English. 

(lived, [isvco, [Aspivrjxa, to remain. 

[lidos, rj, ov, middle in the midst. 

[ASTapdXkco, fiaXco, fiifiXiixa, (fidXXco) to change. 

(isja^olrj, rjs, t\, change. 

{i£Ta7ti[A7tco, vjco, (7tifX7tco) to send after ; more 
common in the Mid. [ASTa7ti[t7TO[Aai, to send for. 

[1st ax idy pi, Orjoco, jidsixa, (ridrffxi) to remove, 
to transfer, to change ; Mid. [xsTaTiOsfAai, to 
change one's self. 

(tinges and [is%Qi, until. 

firj, not, lest ; used like the Latin ne, not for an 



172 VOCABULARY. 

absolute negative (for which ov is employed), 

but conditionally; hence used in prohibitions 

and dependent propositions ; pi} hiye, [tij Xe^jfs, 

do not speak. 
fxtfSi, (pj, 8e) neither, not even ; differs from 

ovds as [Aij differs from ov. 
(j.7]dsis, fivdsfxia, ^8iv, no one ; it differs from 

ovdslg as pij from ov. 
[indi7ioT£, (f.O(d£, tzotb) never. 
31rjSog, ov, a Mede. 
f.ujv 9 in truth, assuredly, moreover. 
jMJTs, (fjtij, ts) both not, neither. 
f-irjz^g, igog, ij, a mother. 
lLiyvvp.1, [iit-a, ^dixiy^iat, to mingle. 
fjiixgos, d, ov, little, small. 
Mil.Tid&\g, ov, 6, Miltiades. 
fxifn^Ti^g, ov, 6, ([upiopou, to imitate) an imitator. 
pifAvijuxco, iA,v)j<ja, (uvdco) to remind ; Mid. [xi- 

[jivijoicouaif [iv)'i<jO{iai, (.ispviffiai, to remember. 
[.uodvdgcQTiog, ov, 6, i\, (fiioeco, to hate, dvdgconog) 

a misanthrope. 
[alcecj, 6, tjaco, fis^uoijxa, to hate. 
fxiadog, ov, 6, wages, a reward. 
{iicoloyog, ov, 6, ij, a hater of knowledge, a 

skeptic. 
(xvrjfia, azog, to, ((.ivdco) a memorial, a monument. 
MvYi^oovvrj, i}g, 7], Mnemosyne, the mother of 

the muses ; memory. 
fiohs, scarcely, with difficulty. 
(x6vi(.wg, ov, 6, ?/, (fxhco) abiding, permanent. 



VOCABULARY. 173 

povos, ?]-, ov, alone, sole. 

ixovaa, ??s, ij, a muse. 

[ivQog, ov, 6, a speech, discourse, fiction, fable a 

Mvaos, ov, 6, a Mysian. 

(.icogia, as, ij, stupidity, folly. 

N. 
vai, yes, certainly. 
Nd$-os, ov, 6, Naxos. 
vaog, ov, 6, a temple. 
vavn^g, ov, 6, (vavg) a sailor. 
veaviag, ov, 6, a youth. 
Netlog, ov, 6, the Nile. 
vexgog, ov, 6, the dead. 
veog, a, oj/, young, new ; ol vkoi, the youths. 
vecpifa], jjg, ??, a cloud. 
vfas, «, 6, a temple. 
vrjaog, ov, 6, an island. 
vixdco, co, ipa, vtvlxyjxa, to conquer. 
v^, 77s, ?), conquest, a victory. 
vo{ii£co, lacD, (vofios, law) to establish by law ; 

to think, to believe. 
voftog, ov, 6, a law. 

voog vovg, voov vov, 6, understanding, mind. 
vodog, ov, 6, disease. 
vvv, now. 
vv|, vvxroff, ?], night. 

Bsviag, ov, 6, Xenias. 
Sevoxgajri^ ovg, 6, Xenocrates. 



174 VOCABULARY. 

Savocpcov, covtos, 6, Xenophon. 
Seg^ijs, ov, 6, Xerxes. 
|f(7Tog, ij, ov, (|aa) polished. 
%icpos, sos, to, a sword. 
%v[Al3ovl>ia, as, ??, counsel, advice. 

O. 

6, ?/, to, the ; 6 ^iv, the one ; 6 £i, the other. 
ode, ijds, i68s, this, this here ; ijde ij dxrij laxiv, 

here is the shore. 
bdos, ov, ?^, a way, a road. 
odovs, oVtos, 6, a tooth. 
§0£v, from whence. 
otda, I know, ^ftj/, I knew ; Subj. etdco, Opt. el- 

Setyv, Imp. i'odi, Inf. slSsvai, Part, eldas. This 

verb is the Ear. Per/, of si'da, to see. 
olxhys, of, 6, (olxos) a domestic, a servant, a 

slave. 
oixico, 6, 7}ci(d, axijxa, to dwell, to inhabit. 
olxifacog, ogos, 6, an inhabitant. 
olxia, as, ?/, a house. 
olvos, ov, 6, wine. 
oiofxat contr. oifiat, olijdopai, cojjdrjv, to think, 

to suppose. 
otdco, Fat. of cpsgco. 
oTos, a, oi/, qualis, correlative of tolos, of what 

kind, of what sort. 
6xr6, eight. 

oXlyos, t\, ov, little ; oliyoi, at, a, few. 
oXhvfxi, 6X6, oXaXsxa, to destroy ; Mid. bXXvjiai, 



VOCABULARY. 175 

Jlor. aXo^y, to perish ; Ear. Perf. oXcoXa, I 

am undone. 
bXog, r\, ov, whole, entire. 
"OfiTjgos, ov, 6, Homer. 

d[u2.ico, gS, rfcta, co^ih^xa, (ofiihog) to be in com- 
pany with, to associate with. 
iififxa, arog, to, (onropcu) a sight, the eye. 
ofxoiog, ot, oi>, similar. 
opoicos, similarly. 

ovsiSl'Cg), loco, (bvstdog) to reproach. 
bvsiSog, sog, to', reproach. 
bvo[ia, arog, to', a name. 
ofi/'s, eta, v, sharp. 
Qity\, where, how, in what manner. 
otzXov, ov, to', a Vv r eapon. 
bncog, (6g) in what manner, how ; that, in order 

that. 
bgdco, a, Fut. bxpoiiai, Perf. icbgaxa, Ear. Jlor. 

eidov, to see. 
oQyij, rjg, q, (bgeyco) mental impulse, passion, 

anger. 
bgyi£o[iou, to be angry. 
ogsya, t-a, chge%a, to stretch, to extend ; Mid. 

ogtyopou, (to stretch one's self) to strive after, 

to aim at. 
ogdog, tf, oV, erect, upright, straight ; right. 
bgog, £os, to, a mountain. 
&, rj, o, who, which, what ; o$ av, whoever ; iv to 

(%govcp), while. 
balcog, (baiog) piously. 



176 VOCABULARY. 

odfxrf, r\s, r/, (o£co, to smell) a smell, an odor. 

oaos, ij, ov, correlative of togos, as much as, as 
great as ; oaot, as many as. 

odTis, iJtls, 8,-11, whoever, whatever, who, what. 

oxav, (ots, civ), when, with Subj. 

ots, when ; sod' ots, there is when, sometimes. 

oti, that, because. 

ov, ovx, ov%, not. 

oi>, ot, I', (from i) of him, of himself. 

ov, where. 

ov8sis, ovdsfiia, ovdsv, (ov8s, sis) no one. 

ov8sjcots, (ov8s, tzote) never. 

ovxsti, (ovx, stl) no longer. 

ovv, {used in connecting a conclusion icith the 
preceding reasoning) then, therefore. 

ovTioTs, (ov, uots) never. 

Ovgavia, as, ii, Urania. 

ovgavos, ov, 6, heaven. 

ovs, coios, to, an ear. 

ovts, (ov, te) neither. 

ovtoi, certainly not. 

ovtos, avTii, tovto, this. See § 24. 

ovtcos and ovtco, thus. 

bcpis, scos, 6, a serpent. 

tiyjov, ov, to, (zvjcd, to boil) originally boiled 
food, flesh, what was eaten with bread ; sub- 
sequently, what was used as seasoning, sauce ; 
as, novos oxpov cots dyadois, labor seasons, 
gives a relish to, our enjoyments. 



VOCABULARY. 177 

27. 

rtdOos, eos ovs, to, (jtddxo) a passion, an affection. 

Ttaideia, as, i\, (7rarg) education, discipline, train- 
ing, instruction, science. 

itais, naiSos, 6, r), a child, a boy, a girl, a slave. 

ndXai, anciently, formerly. 

Udvdsia, as, y, Panthea. 

TCavoitxrjs, ov, 6, {ndv, ontofiai) all- seeing. 

7iavra%6d€v, from every quarter. 

7tavTa%ov, everywhere. 

TtavToios, a, ov, (reds) of all sorts, manifold. 

ndrntos, ov, 6, (udmtas) a grandfather. 

naqayiyvo[iai, yevrjao^iai, yeyivrjftai, {yiyvopai) 
to be present, to come to. 

7tagddsi/[ia, azos, to, (TragadeLZWfxc) a pattern, 
a model, an example. 

nagadeicfos, ov, 6, a pleasure-garden, a park in 
which wild animals are kept. 

naqakan^dva, Xtfyjopai, a'A^cc, (Xapfidvco) to 
take to one's self, to receive what is handed 
down. 

nagaaxsva^co, daco, (dxsvd^o, oxsvos) to prepare, 
to provide, furnish. 

ttagud, ccg, r/, a cheek. 

Ttdgsi[u, eoopai, (jtagd, eifii, to be) to be pres- 
ent ; ol nagovrss, those present. 

ndgsifxt, (jtagd, sfyi, to go) to come to, to 
come forward, to pass by. 

7tagig%o[iai, eXtvao^iai, nagskTJXvda, (i'o^o^cu) 
15 



178 VOCABULARY. 

to come to, to pass by or beyond ; JLor. na- 
grjXOov. 

Tzagsxa, st-co, rtageGpixa, to hold near, to pre- 
sent, to furnish. 

Tiagtaij^iL, aujctco, rtageGziixa, (iVi^t) to place 
near, by, or with ; Aor. Ttagidxiiv, I stood near, 
by the side of; rtagsGiTixa, 1 stand near, by. 

Uagvaaaos, ov, 6, Parnassus. 

rzds, Tiaaa, ndv, all, every. 

Uaoicov, covos, 6, Pasion. 

7taTi\g, egos, 6, a father. 

TiaTgis, tdos, t), native land, country. 

jtavco, Geo, neitavxa, to cause to cease, to cause 
to stop ; Mid. navo^ai, to stop, to cease. 

nuda, oco, TTBTtsixa, to persuade; 7ti7toida, to 
trust ; Mid. netdo^ai, to confide in, to yield 
to, to obey. 

Iletdco, 60s ovs, ?/, Peitho, the goddess of per- 
suasion ; persuasion. 

ji£igdcd,.co, daco, nsTtsigaxa, (icstga) to try, to put 
to the proof; Mid. rcsigdofxat, cofxai, to en- 
deavour, to attempt, to try. 

Ileioidai, cov, 01, Pisiclians. 

jie^ltcco^ yjco, 7t£7toficpa, to send, to conduct. 

Ttevia, as, i), (rcivco, jtovkco, to labor) poverty. 

Ttevrs, five. 

TzsTtlos, ov, 6, a robe, a garment. 

Ttegiig%o[Aai, ikevdofiou, ifajkvda, (sg^ofxcu) to 
go round, to surround. 

uhgiy,aTai)[)i\yvv^a, ggjjt-a (nsgi, xard, giiyvv^a) 
to tear in pieces all around. 



VOCABULARY. 179 

TtBglXvitog, ov, 6, ??, (jtsgi, IvTtrj) excessively 
grieved, deeply sorrowing. 

7t£Qi7taT£co, 6, foe), (ji£gi, naxkco) to walk about. 

7t£Qi%ag7J9, sog, (tzsqi, %aLQco) immoderately joyful. 

IHgoijs, ov, 6, a Persian. 

7ihga, a?, i\, a rock. 

Utfyacfos, ov, b, the horse Pegasus (from 7fnyt], 
a fountain, rniyaXco, as having caused a foun- 
tain to spring on Mt. Helicon by a stroke of 
his hoof). 

ni\yri, ijg, r/, a fountain, a source. 

nrfga, as, ?/, a travelling sack, a wallet. 

7tij%vs, sag, 6, an elbow, an arm, a cubit. 

mxgog, a, ov, sharp, bitter. 

new, Ttio^ai, 71 in cox a, Aor. Imov, to drink. 

TtiTtico, nsaovfiai, 7ZS7noxa, JLor. £U£Gov, to fall, 
to befall, to happen. 

itiaxevo, aa>, 7tS7ii6Tsvxa, (nuQco) to believe, to 
trust. 

itiazog, 7j, 6v, faithful, trustworthy. 

UXdrcov, covog, 6, Plato. 

nXuaiog, Sup. of 7toXvs, most. 

nXijdog, so?, to, (7tXijdco) a multitude. 

nXtfv, except, with Gen. 

ttfajgrfg, £og, 6, ij, (jtXiog, nXico) full. 

nXr^goco, 6, coaco, 7t£7ihjga)xa, to fill. 

nXolov, ov, to, (7tl£co 9 to sail) a ship. 

TtXovctiog, a, ov, rich. 

nXoviico, 6, -qoco, UEixXovz^xa, to be rich. 

nXovzog, ov, b, (jtXoETog, from itoXvg and hog, 
an abundant year) wealth. 



130 VOCABULARY. 

niovxcdv, covos, 6, Pluto, God of the infernal 

regions. 
nodco, rfctco, 7Z£7Touj7ca, to do, to make ; s v ttoulv, 

to do well, to benefit ; Mid. tzolov[a,<u, to 

make to one's self. 
7tofy(ia, axog, xo, a thing made, a work, a poem. 
Tiot^xrjg, ov, 6, a maker, a poet. 
ixotog, a, ov, of what sort, what. 
noifiijv, ivog, 6, a shepherd. 
noXe^uog, a, ov, (noXs^iog) hostile ; ol itoXspiou 

the enemy. 
noXspixdg, if, ov, warlike. 
7t6?.£fios, ov, 6, war. 

Ttdfos, scos, 7j, (itolvg, many) a city, a state. 
noXXdyag, often, many times. 
itohjdvdgcoitog, ov, 6,iq, (jioXvg, avdgcmog) pop- 
ulous. 
TiokvfiadTJg, ios, 6, i\> {no'kvg, fxavddvco) learned. 
tioXvs, noXh], nokv, much, many. 
novvgog, d,6v, (tiovsco) bad, malignant, depraved. 
novog, ov, 6, (jtivco) work, labor. 
JJo(j£l8cov, avog, 6, Neptune, God of the sea. 
noxa^og, ov, 6, a river. 
710X8, when. 

tzote, once, at some time,, at any time, ever. 
tiovs, tzoSos, 6, a foot. 
ngdy^ia, axog, xo, a thing done, a deed ; a thing, 

an affair. 
ngdaaco and ngdxxco, %co, nsngd^a, to act, to 

manage, to be engaged in, to do; ev ngdx- 

xeiv, to be prosperous.. 



VOCABULARY. 181 

TtgsTtsi, (ngiitco) it is becoming, it is befitting. 
ngiofivs, vos, and fos, Poet, for 7tg8dfivTiis, old, 

an old man. 
7tQ£6fivTEQos, a, ov, (Comp. of rtgiofivs) older, 

an elder, and TigsofivTaros, ??, ov, Sup. oldest. 
ngiv, before. 
Ttgodyco, a|«, (ngo, ayco) to lead forward, to go 

forward, to precede. 
ngofiarov, ov, to, a sheep. 
TigodidafM, Sacta, didioxa, Sidofxai, (diSco^u) to 

give up, to betray. 
TtgodoiTjg, ov, 6, a betrayer, a traitor. 
ngoXeya, |ra, Perf Pass, ngoXslsypai, (liyco) 

to speak before, to foretell. 
7tgo<jsg%o[iou, iXsvcfofiaL, sXyXvOa, A or. ngoaijX- 

Oov, to come to, to approach. 
ngookafifidva, fojxpofiou, si'kyya, Aor* ngoaika- 

fiov, (Xafifidvco) to take in addition, to take 

to one's aid. 
ngoisgos, a, ov, (Comp. from ngo) prior, earlier. 
ngoyjJTfjg, ov, o, (ngo, (pqpi) a foreteller, a 

prophet. 
ngcoTos, 7j, ov, (Sup. of ngo) first ; to ngmov, at 

first ; ngSrov, first, adverbially, 
nj-qvos, ij, oV, (mffvai, nkxopai) winged. 
HvOayogas, ov, Pythagoras. 
nv"ky\, -qs, 7/, a gate. 
nvvddvopac, 7tsv(jO[Aai, 7t67tva{Acu r to inquire, to 

learn by inquiry ; Aor. invdo^v. 
nvg, nvgos, to', fire. 

15* 



182 VOCABULARY. 

ticotiote, ever, at any time ; ov nconoxE,. not at 

any time, never. 
nm ; how? in what manner? 
7ias enclitic, somehow ; cods ncos, somehow so. 



gddtos, a, ov, Comp* gaSicov and gdcov, Sup. gc£8c- 

otos and gacnos, easy; adv. gaov, more easily. 
gdOvf-ios, ov, (Radios, 6vi.i6?) careless, slothful. 
gico, gsi/Gopou, to flow ; Jlor. Pass, iggviiv, hence 

Perf. Act. iggviixa. 
gico, Etgiixa, Eigiifiou, to speak, to say ; Fut. igco, 

from Etgco, Jlor. siTtov. 
gijrcog, ogos, 6, (gsco) a speaker, an orator, a 

rhetorician. 
gi'Ca, vs, ij, a root. 
gcopi, ns, i], {goco, g&vvvfit) bodily vigor, strength. 



Udgbeis, ecov, at, Sardis. 

aeavTov, rjs, of thyself, of thee. 

othjvi], 119, ?), the moon. 

on\iaivco, avco, JLor. ioifciriva, (ctrj{j.a, a sign) to 

point out, to indicate. 
ctydco, co, ijaco, osatyiixa, to be silent. 
aiyij, rjs, rf, (aiydco) silence. 
Zixslla, a?, ii, Sicily. 
dtcoTtda, co, ijaco, ctsoicomixa, to be silent. 
axiXog, eos, to, a leg. 
6X71V1), ijs, ii, a tent. 



VOCABULARY. 183 

GftipoG), do, acta, ioxTJvoxa, to pitch a tent, to 
inhabit, to dwell. 

&xid, ctg, i\, a shadow. 

oocpia, as, i\, (ooyos) wisdom, skill in any art 
or science. 

ooyiGTrjs, ov, 6, (aocpos) a wise man, a sophist. 

aocpos, rj, ov, wise, skilful, accomplished. 

andco, 6, doco, to draw. 

ortovdaLos, a, ov, (oTtovdrf, zeal) zealous, dili- 
gent, good. 

oxdois, ecos, i\, (oxdco, laxr^iL) a placing, a stand- 
ing, a rising ; a party, faction, sedition. 

oxavgos, ov, 6, (ioxt^jll, to place) a pale fixed 
upright ; a stake, a cross. 

ctxsvos, r\, ov, (oxivoo) narrow. 

oxigyco, |«, eoxsg%a and saxogya, to love, prop- 
erly with natural affection ; to be satisfied. 

axod, as, i\, a porch, a gallery. 

oxoXos, ov, 6, (oxeXXco) a sending, an armament, 
an equipment. 

oxofia, axos, to, a mouth. 

axgaxsvpa, axos, xo, (oxgaxos) an army. 

Gxgax-qyos, ov, 6, (ox g axos, ay a) a general, a 
commander. 

oxgaxiSxijs, ov, 6, a soldier. 

ov, oov, thou. 

ovyxakeco, co, itioo, ovyxixfyxa, (xaXieo) to call 
together. 

2Jv£weois, scos, 6, Syennesis. 

avXka^dvo, krfyjopat, ovvsifajpa, ovvsXafiov 



184 VOCABULARY. 

(laufidva) to take together with, to aid, to 

seize upon. 
dvlXeya, £co, avvziXo/a, avvsiksy^ai (avv, Xeycu) 

to collect, to bring together. 
avpfiaivco, firfoopou, avfifisfijjxa, owsftyv, (fiatvco) 

to come together, to happen ; ovufiaivsi, it 

befalls, it happens. 
avpcpogd, dg, ?}, (avficpsgco) a bringing together, 

an event, a calamity. 
avvaycovi^o^ai, loofxai, (dycovi'Co (lai) to contend 

together with, to aid. 
dvvavafiodco, 6, ijda, fisfioqxa, (avv, dvd, j3odco) 

to cry out together with. 
cfvvaviaijftii, (civv, dvd, lajijfu) aijjtico, eaujxa, to 

place up together with ; Mid. to rise up with, 
GvvaTtodvifcxco, Oavovficu, ridvy-xa, to die to- 
gether with. 
avvsidco, avvotda, to be conscious of, to know ; 

Fut. ovveidrjaa from avvsiSsa. 
ovvrfdeia, as, ?), (<$vv and ijOos, custom) inter- 
course, association. 
ovvvopos, ov, 6, 7}, (civv, vsfico, to feed) pasturing 

together. 
2vgaxovdios, a, ov, Syracusan. 
avaxiog, ov, 6, rj, (avv, axid, a shadow) shady. 
ov%v6s, rj, ov, dense, thick, much. 
GHpaiooeidyjs, iog, ovg, (acpalga, a ball, a sphere) 

spherical. 
oyaXsgos, d, ov, (a(pdXXco, to cause to reel, to 

deceive) deceitful. 



VOCABULARY. 185 

acpdxxa (same as acpaXco), gco, eayaypcu, to slaugh- 
ter, to stab. 

2Jcply^ yyos, r/, Sphinx. 

6%okd£cd, daco, ((j%ofaj, leisure) to be at leisure, 
to have leisure for any thing; hence, to devote 
one's time to, to attend to, to study. 

cfco^o, cfco, aiaaxa, oioco^ai and g£<jg)6{icu, (aas, 
safe) to save, to deliver. 

JZaxgdxqs, eos ovg, 6, Socrates. 

JZaxgaxixos, 6, the Socratic philosopher. 

aofia, axos, to, a body. 

daxjjg, ijgog, 6, (da^a) a preserver, a deliverer. 

daxrjgta, as, y\, the act of preserving, safety, 
deliverance. 

dacpgovio, -qaco, (a6(pgcov) to be of sound mind, 
to be sober. 

aacpgoavvrf, ?/s, ?J, (oacpgav) soundness of mind, 
sobriety, discretion. 

GGHpgav, ovos, 6, t\, (aas, (pgrjv) of sound mind, 
sober, temperate, discreet ; Camp, ococpgovi- 

OTSgOS, Sup. GCdCpgOviOTOLTOS. 



xdkavxov, of, to', (xXda) a pair of scales ; weight, 
that which is weighed, a talent. 

TdvxaXos, ov, 6, Tantalus. 

Tdgxagos, ov, 6, Tartarus, the lowest and dark- 
est part of the infernal regions. 

xdoaco, |«, xi Ta#a, xixay^iai, to station, to arrange. 

XQtrVgos, ov y 6, a bull. 



186 VOCABULARY. 

Td%L6T0S, 7], OV, Slip. (111(1 

Tax'uov and ddaacov or ddxxcov, Comp. from 

ra%vs, eta, v, swift ; as rd/tGia, as quickly as 
possible, immediately. 

ret/os, sos ovs, to, a wall. 

xsxvov, ov, to, (tlxtco, to bring forth) a child. 

jsXsvidco, v^aco, TSTsXsvT^xa, (rslos, end) to end, 
to finish ; with ellipsis of $iov, to die. 

jsXsvrij, rjs, i\, an end, death. 

tsXos, sos ovs, to', an end, accomplishment. 

rifivco, TSfico, Tsxp\xa, TtT [irjfxou, Aor. JLct. era- 
fiov, to cut. 

TSQtjv, siva, rsgsv, (rsgco, jslgco, to rub) rubbed, 
made smooth ; hence tender, soft, delicate. 

zigyjis, sag, 7/, (rsgnco, to delight) delight, satis- 
faction. 

ts%vi], jjs, rf 9 (probably from tsxcd, tlxto, akin 
to tsv/co) art. 

TiOijfii, dijaco, ridsixa, (Oia) to place, to put 

tlxtco, ts^co commonly Ts^ofiai, jsroxa, (rsxco) to 
bring forth, to produce. 

Tifidco, co, ijdcd, TSTifiijxa, TSTiui^iai, (xiprj) to es- 
timate, to value, to honor. 

TifjLtj, ijs, 1), (tig) estimation, value, price, honor. 

Tifiios, a, ov, honorable, esteemed. 

Tifccogico, wfico, TSTificognxa, (Tificogog, Tifitj) to aid, 
to assist, to punish ; Mid. Tif.icdgeof.iai, to aid 
one's self against any one, to avenge one's 
self, to punish. 

Tificogia, as, y, succour, vengeance, punishment. 



VOCABULARY. 187 

Tivco, TLdco, rhlxa, TSTifiai, (rio) to estimate, to 
value ; to pay the price of any thing, to ex- 
piate, to pay a penalty. 

Tig, ti, twos, any one, some one, a certain one. 

its, Ti, TLvog, who? what? 

Titiis, scog, r/, (rico) estimation, valuation; com* 
monly punishment, revenge. 

TiG>cia(pegvr]s, eog ovg, 6, Tissaphernes, a Persian 
satrap. 

Toiovrog, touxvt?], joiovTo and toiovtov, (a length- 
ened form of Tolog) such, such like, 

Toledo, ijca, TEToXfinxa, (toA^oc, iXdco) to bear, 
to endure, to dare. 

toztqs, ov, 6, a place, a site. 

jgdits'Ca, ??s, ^, a table. 

TQETtCd, VJG), TSZQOCpa, tO tUHl J Mid. TQ£7tO[lCU, to 

turn one's self, to turn intrans. 

TQsepco, dgivjco, ihgocpa, TeOga^fiai, idgicpQ-qv and 
exgdcpyjv, to nourish. 

J 9^X co i 8gaiiov[xai 9 Sedgd^xa^ s'Sgapov, (dgs(.ia) 
to run. 

Tgifico, ipcj, T£Tg7<pa, T£Tgi[ii[iou, to rub, to wear 
away, to beat, to spend ; elliptically, to spend 
time, to follow any pursuit. 

TgiTJgrjg, eog ovg, tj, (rgcg^ ago, to fit) an Adj. used 
with ellipsis of vavg, a ship with three benches 
of oars on each side, a trireme, a galley. 

igkog, 7}, ov, the third. 

rgoitog, ov, 6, (rgsKa) a turning, a mode, man- 
ner, turn of mind, disposition. 



188 VOCABULARY. 

TVTtog, ov, 6, (tvuto) a blow, a mark made by 
a blow ; hence, a mark, impression, form, fig- 
ure ; an image, model, pattern. 

tvtctco, ipa, TETvcpa, t£tv[1[jlgu, to strike, to beat. 

Tvgavvtg, idos, ?/, (tvqolvvos) arbitrary power, 
sovereignty, dominion. 

TvcpXos, r\, ov, blind. 

Tx>xr\, y\s, i}, (iv%<o) chance, fortune. 

r. 

vy'uia, as, 77, (vyirjs) health, soundness. 

vSga, as, ?), a hydra, a water-serpent. 

vdcog, oltos, to, (yco, to make wet, to rain) water. 

vios, ov, 6, a son. 

vTtSQpsysO}]?, eos, 6, 7f, (yrtig, psysdos) exceed- 
ingly great. 

vitsgogdco, to, oyjofxai, a^iou, vitsgelSov, (vnig, 
ogdco) to look over, to overlook, to despise. 

vnvos, ov, 6, sleep. 

vmios, a, ov, (yno) bent backwards, laid on the 
back. 

vorsgaios, a, ov, (varsgos) on the following day. 

vaxsgov, afterwards. 

vvjijXos, ij, ov, (yvjos, height) high, lofty. 

vvjos, eos, to, height. 

0. 

cpaivco, (pava, nlcpa/xa, Aor. tcp-qva, to show, to 
make to appear ; Mid. (paivopcu, to appear ; 
Ear. Per/, nicpijva, I have appeared. 



VOCABULARY. 189 

(pavsgos, a, ov, manifest, plain. 

(pdgpaxov, ov, to, a medicine, a drug, a poison. 

cpavlos, t\, ov, bad, worthless, vile. 

(pegoo, oiaco, ivrjvo%a, ivrjveypcu, JLor. iiveyxa and 

ijvsyxov, to bear, to bring ; Mid. (pigofjiou, to 

bear one's self, to rush on ; (pigs, come on. 
(petty a, (psv^ofxai, 7ti(pevya, Aor. l(pvyov, to flee. 
<pijffl 9 qs> t\<> (ww' 1 ) a sa y m g> report, reputation. 
(pr^xl, (pr\6(o, Imp, l(pi7v with Aor. signification, 

to say, declare, to affirm. 
cpOovia, £, 7J(jo, ((pdovos, envy) to envy. 
(ptXdv6g(07tos, ov, 6, 7), (cpiXos, avdgamos) that 

loves mankind, benevolent, philanthropic. 
(piXagyvgla, as, i\, (cpikos, dgyvgos) love of 

money, avarice. 
(pikea, co, i\6(d, rtscplXrjxa, to love. 
(pikia, as, 71, attachment, love, friendship. 
<Pi).LTt7ios, ov, 6, Philip. 
(piXofxaOTJs, ios, 6, 77, ((pckos, pavddvoo) fond of 

learning. 
(piloTtoveo, co, Tjdco, ((pilos, novos) to love labor, 

to be industrious. 
(piXonovia, as, -q, love of labor, diligence. 
(pilonovos, ov, 6, i\, fond of labor, industrious, 

diligent. 
epilog, ov, 6, a friend. 
(ptloao(pia, a?, 7), love of wisdom or of an art, 

philosophy. 
(piX6ao(pog, ov, 6, (cpiXos, 60(pia) a lover of wis- 
dom, a philosopher. 
16 



190 VOCABULARY. 

(piXovjv%os, ov, 6, 71, (cpttos, ipv/rj) loving life, 
timid. 

cpXvageco, co, I'ldco, (ipXvagos, cpkvco, to boil over, 
to bubble) to prate, to talk idly. 

(pofisco, a, feed, 7i8(p6(3i7xa, (cpofios) to terrify ; 
Mid. (poj3iof.iai, ovfiai, to fear. 

(pofios, ov, 6, (<psftc>, cpefio^at) fear. 

0oivixi7, lis, ii, Phoenicia. 

fpoivi!-, ixos, 6, a Phoenician ; the palm tree ; 
the fruit of the palm, the date. 

cpondco, a, iJgco, to go back and forth, to fre- 
quent ; often to go to school. 

&6gxos, ov, 6, Phorcus. 

(pgovtioig, sag, ?/, (cpQovsco) understanding, intel- 
ligence, prudence. 

<pg6vipos, ov, 6, 7(, {(pgi\v, mind) intelligent, pru- 
dent. 

cpvXaxij, rjs, i), (cpvldaaco) guarding, watching, a 
guard, a prison. 

(pvldzico, %co, necpvkaxa, to watch, to guard ; 
Mid, (pvXdzTouou, to be on one's guard, to 
beware of. 

(pvatg, sea?, i), (jcpvco) the act of producing, gen- 
eration, nature. 

(pvco, (pvaa, Tzzcpvy.a, to produce ; Mid. cpvopcu, 
to spring into existence, to grow ; nicpvxcc 
and ecpvv, to be by nature, to be constituted. 

fpco'xtcov, covos, 6, Phocion. 

(pavy, rjs, ij, a sound, a voice. 

(pas, (pcoTos, to, light. 



VOCABULARY, 191 



X. 



%aiga, %cug?j(jG), K£%dgiixa, K£%dgij[iai, to rejoice. 

%al£7tos, t\, ov, hard, difficult. 

%agd, as, t\, (%aiga) joy. 

%agius, sGcta, ev, (%dgis) graceful, charming, 

elegant, agreeable. 
%dgis, itos, r\, (%aiga) that which gives delight, 

grace, beauty, a favor. 
%£tg, y£igos, ?/, a hand. 
%£igcGzos, t\, ov, Sup. of xaxos, worst. 
%ijv£Los, a, ov, (%rjv, a goose) pertaining to a 

goose. 
%it6v, covos, 6, an under garment, a tunic. 
ygdopai, cofiai, (ygdco) %g?fco[iou, xkygyipai, to 

use. 
%g£ia, as, ?/, (xgda) need, use. 
%g£cov, to, (indeclinable) necessity, fate, destiny. 
'%grfi Impers. it behooves, it is necessary, Lat, 

oportet. 
%gi}[xa, aios, to, (ygdco) a thing that is used, a 

thing ; PL ygrjfiaja, possessions, treasures. 
ygjjatfios, 7}, ov, useful. 
ygovos, ov, 6, time. 

ygvciov, ov, to', and ygvaos, ov, 6, gold. 
XgvGo^iaXXog, ov, 6, -q, (%gvci6s 9 {laXXos) having 

a golden fleece. 
ycolos, ?j, ov, lame. 
%aga, a?, q, a region, a space. 
ycogko, 6, TJda, x£%6gqxa, to have room, to hold 3 

to give room for, to retire, to go. 



192 



VOCABULARY. 



ipv^rj, rjs, ?), life, the soul. 

Si. 

as, as. 

coots, so as, so that. 



ERRATA. 

Page 28, line 1, for § 61, read § 65. 
" " « 2, " § 75, " § 79. 




LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 

mi in linn mil 



003 035 533 7 J}' 



